diff --git a/data/it/3d/cubeline b/data/it/3d/cubeline new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..49e6bb14e0 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/3d/cubeline differ diff --git a/data/it/3d/cubetext b/data/it/3d/cubetext new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ccf51c3b72 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/3d/cubetext differ diff --git a/data/it/3d/gears b/data/it/3d/gears new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7b538578c4 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/3d/gears differ diff --git a/data/it/3d/house.3ds b/data/it/3d/house.3ds new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5cd6911c40 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/3d/house.3ds differ diff --git a/data/it/3d/logio.bmp b/data/it/3d/logio.bmp new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..62547a9cf1 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/3d/logio.bmp differ diff --git a/data/it/File Managers/eolite.ini b/data/it/File Managers/eolite.ini new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4fd8834f8b --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/File Managers/eolite.ini @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +[Associations] +asm=TinyPad +inc=TinyPad +ini=TinyPad +txt=TinyPad +gif=/sys/media/kiv +bmp=/sys/media/kiv +png=/sys/media/kiv +tga=/sys/media/kiv +jpg=/sys/media/kiv +jpeg=/sys/media/kiv +ico=/sys/media/kiv +cur=/sys/media/kiv +pcx=/sys/media/kiv +xcf=/sys/media/kiv +pbm=/sys/media/kiv +pgm=/sys/media/kiv +pnm=/sys/media/kiv +tif=/sys/media/kiv +tiff=/sys/media/kiv +wbmp=/sys/media/kiv +3ds=/sys/3d/view3ds +lif=/sys/demos/life2 +skn=/sys/desktop +htm=/sys/HTMLv +html=/sys/HTMLv +mht=/sys/HTMLv +fb2=/sys/HTMLv +rtf=/sys/RtfRead +obj=/sys/develop/cObj +sna=/sys/e80 +nes=/sys/games/fceu +xm=/sys/media/AC97SND +wav=/sys/media/AC97SND +mp3=/sys/media/AC97SND +mid=/sys/media/MIDAMP +m3u=/sys/media/listplay +lap=/sys/media/listplay +asf=/sys/media/listplay +kla=/sys/games/klavisha +avi=/bd0/4/fplay +mkv=/bd0/4/fplay +vob=/bd0/4/fplay +flv=/bd0/4/fplay +mp4=/bd0/4/fplay +mpg=/bd0/4/fplay +mpeg=/bd0/4/fplay +smc=/bd0/4/zsnes +pdf=/bd0/4/updf +mcr=/bd0/4/psx4all + +[Config] +SelectionColor=94AECE +LineHeight=18 +ShowDeviceName=1 + +[UserDirectories] +;ïàïêè äëÿ áûñòðîãî ïåðåõîäà - ïîêà ÷òî íå ðàáîòàåò +/bd0/4/kolibri/ + diff --git a/data/it/File Managers/icons.ini b/data/it/File Managers/icons.ini new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..26c015a42d --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/File Managers/icons.ini @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ +asm=4 +inc=4 +txt=3 +rtf=3 +ini=3 +log=3 +dic=3 +doc=3 +exc=3 +wtx=3 +inf=3 +xml=3 +odt=3 +jpg=6 +jpe=6 +jpeg=6 +jif=6 +jfif=6 +jp2=6 +jpx=6 +jpk=6 +j2k=6 +jpc=6 +j2c=6 +bmp=6 +dib=6 +rle=6 +pbm=6 +pgm=6 +pnm=6 +wbm=6 +wbmp=6 +xbm=6 +xpm=6 +gif=6 +png=6 +ico=6 +cur=6 +ani=6 +tif=6 +tiff=6 +xif=6 +tga=6 +pcx=6 +xcf=6 +dcx=6 +ppm=6 +psd=6 +psp=6 +raw=6 +raf=6 +x3f=6 +orf=6 +nef=6 +mrw=6 +dcr=6 +crw=6 +cr2=6 +ras=6 +pix=6 +pict=6 +pct=6 +pic=6 +pef=6 +pcd=6 +iff=6 +lbm=6 +ilbm=6 +fpx=6 +djv=6 +djvu=6 +iw4=6 +wav=7 +mp3=7 +xm=7 +mid=7 +midi=7 +aif=7 +aifc=7 +aiff=7 +au=7 +snd=7 +wma=7 +wm=7 +avi=11 +mpg=11 +mpe=11 +mpeg=11 +flv=11 +3gp=11 +mkv=11 +wmv=11 +mov=11 +mp4=11 +img=5 +ima=5 +imz=5 +bwz=5 +dsk=5 +vfd=5 +wil=5 +wlz=5 +exe=8 +com=8 +bat=8 +7z=9 +rar=9 +zip=9 +cab=9 +arj=9 +lha=9 +lzh=9 +tar=9 +taz=9 +tbz=9 +tbz2=9 +bz=9 +bz2=9 +ice=9 +gz=9 +tgz=9 +uue=9 +uu=9 +xxe=9 +z=9 +dat=10 +ttf=12 +ttc=12 +chr=12 +mt=12 +htm=13 +html=13 +mht=13 +eml=13 +lif=14 +3ds=15 +kex=16 +skn=17 +obj=18 +dll=18 +ocx=18 +so=18 +drv=18 diff --git a/data/it/File Managers/kfar.ini b/data/it/File Managers/kfar.ini new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d5848a1973 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/File Managers/kfar.ini @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +[Associations] +asm=/sys/TinyPad; AsmMenu1,AsmMenu2 +inc=/sys/TinyPad +ini=/sys/TinyPad +txt=/sys/TinyPad +jpg=/sys/media/kiv +jpeg=/sys/media/kiv +gif=/sys/media/kiv; ViewGraph,MenuAnimage +wav=/sys/media/AC97SND +mp3=/sys/media/AC97SND +xm=/sys/media/AC97SND +mid=/sys/media/MIDAMP +bmp=/sys/media/kiv; ViewGraph,MenuAnimage +png=/sys/media/kiv +ico=/sys/media/kiv +cur=/sys/media/kiv +pcx=/sys/media/kiv +xcf=/sys/media/kiv +pbm=/sys/media/kiv +pgm=/sys/media/kiv +pnm=/sys/media/kiv +tif=/sys/media/kiv +tiff=/sys/media/kiv +wbmp=/sys/media/kiv +rtf=/sys/RtfRead +3ds=/sys/3d/view3ds +lif=/sys/demos/life2 +skn=/sys/desktop +m3u=/sys/media/listplay +lap=/sys/media/listplay +asf=/sys/media/listplay +cvs=/sys/graph +obj=/sys/develop/cObj +nes=/sys/fceu +sna=/sys/e80 +htm=/sys/HTMLv +html=/sys/HTMLv +fb2=/sys/HTMLv + + +[Menu] +AsmMenu1=&Edit,/sys/TinyPad +AsmMenu2=&Compile,/sys/develop/fasm +ViewGraph=&View,/sys/media/kiv +MenuAnimage=&Edit,/sys/media/animage + +[Panels] +; View modes for files on panels +; values correspond to digits for LCtrl+<1-4> +LeftViewMode=2 +RightViewMode=2 +; Sort modes for files on panels +; values are 2 * N + M, where +; M = 0 - normal sorting, M = 1 - reverse sorting +; N = 0-6 correspond to sort mode for Ctrl+F<3-9> +LeftSortMode=0 +RightSortMode=0 + +[Editor] +; Symbols for end-of-line, which will be added by kfar editor +; when new line will be created: +; DOS - like in DOS/Win (0D 0A), Unix - like in Unix (0A), +; Mac - like in Mac (0D) +EOLStyle=Unix + +[FolderShortcuts] +; You can define up to 10 links to folders Shortcut0...Shortcut9, +; the quick jump to such folders can be done with RCtrl+ +Shortcut0=/rd/1 + +[Confirmations] +Delete=1 +DeleteIncomplete=0 + +[Plugins] +; On left of the equal sign any sensical or nonsensical name can appear; +; on right - path to plugin. +; If path is not absolute, it is counted from the folder with kfar binary. +ArchiveReader=/sys/lib/archiver.obj diff --git a/data/it/File Managers/kfm.ini b/data/it/File Managers/kfm.ini new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dc8c6c4505 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/File Managers/kfm.ini @@ -0,0 +1,199 @@ +start +<>icons_associations +asm 0004 +inc 0004 +txt 0003 +rtf 0003 +ini 0003 +log 0003 +dic 0003 +doc 0003 +exc 0003 +wtx 0003 +inf 0003 +jpg 0006 +jpe 0006 +jpeg 0006 +jif 0006 +jfif 0006 +jp2 0006 +jpx 0006 +jpk 0006 +j2k 0006 +jpc 0006 +j2c 0006 +bmp 0006 +dib 0006 +rle 0006 +wbm 0006 +wbmp 0006 +xbm 0006 +xpm 0006 +gif 0006 +png 0006 +ico 0006 +cur 0006 +ani 0006 +tif 0006 +tiff 0006 +xif 0006 +tga 0006 +pcx 0006 +pbm 0006 +pgm 0006 +pnm 0006 +xcf 0006 +dcx 0006 +ppm 0006 +psd 0006 +psp 0006 +raw 0006 +raf 0006 +x3f 0006 +orf 0006 +nef 0006 +mrw 0006 +dcr 0006 +crw 0006 +cr2 0006 +ras 0006 +pix 0006 +pict 0006 +pct 0006 +pic 0006 +pef 0006 +pcd 0006 +iff 0006 +lbm 0006 +ilbm 0006 +fpx 0006 +djv 0006 +djvu 0006 +iw4 0006 +wav 0007 +mp3 0007 +xm 0007 +mid 0007 +midi 0007 +aif 0007 +aifc 0007 +aiff 0007 +au 0007 +snd 0007 +wma 0007 +wm 0007 +avi 0011 +mpg 0011 +mov 0011 +flv 0011 +wmv 0011 +vob 0011 +mkv 0011 +mp4 0011 +mpeg 0011 +3gp 0011 +img 0005 +ima 0005 +imz 0005 +bwz 0005 +dsk 0005 +vfd 0005 +wil 0005 +wlz 0005 +exe 0008 +com 0008 +bat 0008 +7z 0009 +rar 0009 +zip 0009 +cab 0009 +arj 0009 +lha 0009 +lzh 0009 +tar 0009 +taz 0009 +tbz 0009 +tbz2 0009 +bz 0009 +bz2 0009 +ice 0009 +gz 0009 +tgz 0009 +uue 0009 +uu 0009 +xxe 0009 +z 0009 +dat 0010 +ttf 0012 +ttc 0012 +chr 0012 +mt 0012 +htm 0013 +html 0013 +lif 0014 +3ds 0015 +kex 0016 +skn 0017 +<>end + +<>files_associations +asm /sys/tinypad +inc /sys/tinypad +txt /sys/tinypad +ini /sys/tinypad +log /sys/tinypad +dat /sys/tinypad +inf /sys/tinypad +bat /sys/tinypad +jpg /sys/media/kiv +jpeg /sys/media/kiv +jpe /sys/media/kiv +gif /sys/media/kiv +wav /sys/media/ac97snd +mp3 /sys/media/ac97snd +xm /sys/media/ac97snd +mid /sys/media/midamp +bmp /sys/media/kiv +png /sys/media/kiv +ico /sys/media/kiv +cur /sys/media/kiv +pcx /sys/media/kiv +xcf /sys/media/kiv +pbm /sys/media/kiv +pgm /sys/media/kiv +pnm /sys/media/kiv +tif /sys/media/kiv +tiff /sys/media/kiv +wbmp /sys/media/kiv +rtf /sys/rtfread +3ds /sys/3d/view3ds +lif /sys/demos/life2 +skn /sys/desktop +avi /hd0/1/fplay.kex +mpg /hd0/1/fplay.kex +mov /hd0/1/fplay.kex +flv /hd0/1/fplay.kex +wmv /hd0/1/fplay.kex +vob /hd0/1/fplay.kex +mkv /hd0/1/fplay.kex +mp4 /hd0/1/fplay.kex +mpeg /hd0/1/fplay.kex +3gp /hd0/1/fplay.kex +m3u /sys/media/listplay +lap /sys/media/listplay +asf /sys/media/listplay +cvs /sys/graph +obj /sys/develop/cObj +nes /sys/fceu +sna /sys/e80 +htm /sys/HTMLv +html /sys/HTMLv +fb2 /sys/HTMLv +kla /sys/games/klavisha +<>end + +<>files_association1 +bmp /sys/media/animage +<>end + +end diff --git a/data/it/Makefile b/data/it/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d84ab247ac --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,639 @@ +# General rule for naming: variables with CAPITALIZED names hold settings, +# you can - and are expected - to modify it; variables with lowercase names +# are intermediate variables and macroses not to be modified unless you +# know what you're doing. + +# Define directories for destination, source repository, sources of kernel, sources of programs. +BUILD_DIR:=build +REPOSITORY:=../.. +KERNEL:=$(REPOSITORY)/kernel/trunk +PROGS:=$(REPOSITORY)/programs + +# The main goal: build kolibri.img and kolibri.iso +all: $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.iso + +# Docpak requires some documents; we place them +# into 'docs' subdir and communicate with FASM +# through environment var DOCDIR. +DOCDIR:=docs/ +export DOCDIR + +# Because most programs are written in FASM and have +# the common structure of one main .asm file possibly including +# several .inc files, we handle this case separately. +# Namely, we organize one big list of such programs +# (FASM_PROGRAMS, see below) containing name of local binary file, +# name of file inside kolibri.img and name of the source file. +# This list is maintained by hand, and the rest is done with some macroses... +# well, slightly complicated macroses - however, you do not need to +# understand them in order to maintain the list. +# To add a FASM program with one .asm file, just +# add the corresponding item to the list and enjoy +# the power of GNU make. + +# The list of all FASM programs with one main FASM file. +# Every item consists of three parts, separated by ':'. +# First part is the real name of binary file in $(BUILD_DIR) +# as it should be produced by make. +# Second part is the name of a file inside kolibri.img, +# usually uppercased version of first part - to save space +# for FAT filesystem. +# Third part is the name of the source file. +# Spaces separate items, so spaces in names should be +# represented as '|'. +FASM_PROGRAMS:=\ + @clip:@CLIP:$(PROGS)/system/clip/trunk/@clip.ASM \ + @menu:@MENU:$(PROGS)/system/menu/trunk/menu.asm \ + @notify:@NOTIFY:$(PROGS)/system/notify/trunk/@notify.asm \ + @panel:@PANEL:$(PROGS)/system/panel/trunk/@PANEL.ASM \ + @rb:@RB:$(PROGS)/system/rb/trunk/@RB.ASM \ + @ss:@SS:$(PROGS)/system/ss/trunk/@ss.asm\ + refrscrn:REFRSCRN:$(PROGS)/system/refrscrn/refrscrn.asm \ + asciivju:ASCIIVJU:$(PROGS)/develop/asciivju/trunk/asciivju.asm \ + calc:CALC:$(PROGS)/other/calc/trunk/calc.asm \ + calendar:CALENDAR:$(PROGS)/system/calendar/trunk/calendar.asm \ + commouse:COMMOUSE:$(PROGS)/system/commouse/trunk/commouse.asm \ + cpu:CPU:$(PROGS)/system/cpu/trunk/cpu.asm \ + cpuid:CPUID:$(PROGS)/system/cpuid/trunk/CPUID.ASM \ + desktop:DESKTOP:$(PROGS)/system/desktop/trunk/desktop.asm \ + disptest:DISPTEST:$(PROGS)/system/disptest/trunk/disptest.ASM \ + docpack:DOCPACK:$(PROGS)/system/docpack/trunk/docpack.asm \ + end:END:$(PROGS)/system/end/light/end.asm \ + gmon:GMON:$(PROGS)/system/gmon/gmon.asm \ + hdd_info:HDD_INFO:$(PROGS)/system/hdd_info/trunk/hdd_info.asm \ + icon:ICON:$(PROGS)/system/icon/trunk/icon.asm \ + cropflat:CROPFLAT:$(PROGS)/system/cropflat/cropflat.asm \ + kbd:KBD:$(PROGS)/system/kbd/trunk/kbd.ASM \ + kpack:KPACK:$(PROGS)/other/kpack/trunk/kpack.asm \ + launcher:LAUNCHER:$(PROGS)/system/launcher/trunk/launcher.asm \ + magnify:MAGNIFY:$(PROGS)/demos/magnify/trunk/magnify.asm \ + mgb:MGB:$(PROGS)/system/mgb/trunk/mgb.asm \ + mousemul:MOUSEMUL:$(PROGS)/system/mousemul/trunk/mousemul.asm \ + madmouse:MADMOUSE:$(PROGS)/other/madmouse/madmouse.asm \ + mykey:MYKEY:$(PROGS)/system/MyKey/trunk/MyKey.asm \ + pcidev:PCIDEV:$(PROGS)/system/pcidev/trunk/PCIDEV.ASM \ + pic4:PIC4:$(PROGS)/media/pic4/trunk/pic4.asm \ + rdsave:RDSAVE:$(PROGS)/system/rdsave/trunk/rdsave.asm \ + rtfread:RTFREAD:$(PROGS)/other/rtfread/trunk/rtfread.asm \ + run:RUN:$(PROGS)/system/run/trunk/run.asm \ + scrshoot:SCRSHOOT:$(PROGS)/media/scrshoot/scrshoot.asm \ + setup:SETUP:$(PROGS)/system/setup/trunk/setup.asm \ + test:TEST:$(PROGS)/system/test/trunk/test.asm \ + tinypad:TINYPAD:$(PROGS)/develop/tinypad/trunk/tinypad.asm \ + zkey:ZKEY:$(PROGS)/system/zkey/trunk/ZKEY.ASM \ + 3d/3dcube2:3D/3DCUBE2:$(PROGS)/demos/3dcube2/trunk/3DCUBE2.ASM \ + 3d/3dsheart:3D/3DSHEART:$(PROGS)/demos/3dsheart/trunk/3dsheart.asm \ + 3d/3dwav:3D/3DWAV:$(PROGS)/demos/3dwav/trunk/3dwav.asm \ + 3d/crownscr:3D/CROWNSCR:$(PROGS)/demos/crownscr/trunk/crownscr.asm \ + 3d/flatwav:3D/FLATWAV:$(PROGS)/demos/flatwav/trunk/FLATWAV.ASM \ + 3d/free3d04:3D/FREE3D04:$(PROGS)/demos/free3d04/trunk/free3d04.asm \ + 3d/view3ds:3D/VIEW3DS:$(PROGS)/demos/3DS/VIEW3DS.ASM \ + demos/bcdclk:DEMOS/BCDCLK:$(PROGS)/demos/bcdclk/trunk/bcdclk.asm \ + demos/circle:DEMOS/CIRCLE:$(PROGS)/develop/examples/circle/trunk/circle.asm \ + demos/colorref:DEMOS/COLORREF:$(PROGS)/demos/colorref/trunk/colorref.asm \ + demos/cslide:DEMOS/CSLIDE:$(PROGS)/demos/cslide/trunk/cslide.asm \ + demos/eyes:DEMOS/EYES:$(PROGS)/demos/eyes/trunk/eyes.asm \ + demos/fire:DEMOS/FIRE:$(PROGS)/demos/fire/trunk/fire.asm \ + demos/firework:DEMOS/FIREWORK:$(PROGS)/demos/firework/trunk/firework.asm \ + demos/movback:DEMOS/MOVBACK:$(PROGS)/demos/movback/trunk/movback.asm \ + demos/plasma:DEMOS/PLASMA:$(PROGS)/demos/plasma/trunk/plasma.asm \ + demos/timer:DEMOS/TIMER:$(PROGS)/demos/timer/trunk/timer.asm \ + demos/tinyfrac:DEMOS/TINYFRAC:$(PROGS)/demos/tinyfrac/trunk/tinyfrac.asm \ + demos/trantest:DEMOS/TRANTEST:$(PROGS)/demos/trantest/trunk/trantest.asm \ + demos/tube:DEMOS/TUBE:$(PROGS)/demos/tube/trunk/tube.asm \ + demos/unvwater:DEMOS/UNVWATER:$(PROGS)/demos/unvwater/trunk/unvwater.asm \ + demos/web:DEMOS/WEB:$(PROGS)/demos/web/trunk/web.asm \ + develop/board:DEVELOP/BOARD:$(PROGS)/system/board/trunk/board.asm \ + develop/cObj:DEVELOP/cObj:$(PROGS)/develop/cObj/trunk/cObj.asm \ + develop/fasm:DEVELOP/FASM:$(PROGS)/develop/fasm/trunk/fasm.asm \ + develop/h2d2b:DEVELOP/H2D2B:$(PROGS)/develop/h2d2b/trunk/h2d2b.asm \ + develop/heed:DEVELOP/HEED:$(PROGS)/develop/heed/trunk/heed.asm \ + develop/ipc:DEVELOP/IPC:$(PROGS)/network/ipc/trunk/ipc.asm \ + develop/keyascii:DEVELOP/KEYASCII:$(PROGS)/develop/keyascii/trunk/keyascii.asm \ + develop/mtdbg:DEVELOP/MTDBG:$(PROGS)/develop/mtdbg/mtdbg.asm \ + develop/scancode:DEVELOP/SCANCODE:$(PROGS)/develop/scancode/trunk/scancode.asm \ + develop/t_edit:DEVELOP/T_EDIT:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/t_edit.asm \ + develop/test_gets:DEVELOP/test_gets:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/console/examples/test_gets.asm \ + develop/testcon2:DEVELOP/TESTCON2:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/console/examples/testcon2.asm \ + develop/thread:DEVELOP/THREAD:$(PROGS)/develop/examples/thread/trunk/thread.asm \ + develop/info/asm.syn:DEVELOP/INFO/ASM.SYN:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/info/asm_syn.asm \ + develop/info/cpp_kol_cla.syn:DEVELOP/INFO/CPP_KOL_CLA.SYN:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/info/cpp_kol_cla_syn.asm \ + develop/info/cpp_kol_dar.syn:DEVELOP/INFO/CPP_KOL_DAR.SYN:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/info/cpp_kol_dar_syn.asm \ + develop/info/cpp_kol_def.syn:DEVELOP/INFO/CPP_KOL_DEF.SYN:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/info/cpp_kol_def_syn.asm \ + develop/info/default.syn:DEVELOP/INFO/DEFAULT.SYN:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/info/default_syn.asm \ + develop/info/html.syn:DEVELOP/INFO/HTML.SYN:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/info/html_syn.asm \ + develop/info/ini_files.syn:DEVELOP/INFO/INI_FILES.SYN:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/info/ini_files_syn.asm \ + develop/info/win_const.syn:DEVELOP/INFO/WIN_CONST.SYN:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/info/win_const_syn.asm \ + drivers/com_mouse.obj:DRIVERS/COM_MOUSE.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/com_mouse.asm \ + drivers/emu10k1x.obj:DRIVERS/EMU10K1X.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/emu10k1x.asm \ + drivers/fm801.obj:DRIVERS/FM801.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/fm801.asm \ + drivers/infinity.obj:DRIVERS/INFINITY.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/infinity.asm \ + drivers/ps2mouse.obj:DRIVERS/PS2MOUSE.OBJ:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/mouse/ps2mouse4d/trunk/ps2mouse.asm \ + drivers/sb16.obj:DRIVERS/SB16.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/sb16/sb16.asm \ + drivers/sound.obj:DRIVERS/SOUND.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/sound.asm \ + drivers/tmpdisk.obj:DRIVERS/TMPDISK.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/tmpdisk.asm \ + drivers/vt8235.obj:DRIVERS/VT8235.OBJ:$(KERNEL)/drivers/vt823x.asm \ + File|Managers/kfar:File|Managers/KFAR:$(PROGS)/fs/kfar/trunk/kfar.asm \ + File|Managers/kfm:File|Managers/KFM:$(PROGS)/fs/kfm/trunk/kfm.asm \ + File|Managers/opendial:File|Managers/OPENDIAL:$(PROGS)/fs/opendial/opendial.asm \ + games/15:GAMES/15:$(PROGS)/games/15/trunk/15.ASM \ + games/arcanii:GAMES/ARCANII:$(PROGS)/games/arcanii/trunk/arcanii.asm \ + games/freecell:GAMES/FREECELL:$(PROGS)/games/freecell/freecell.asm \ + games/gomoku:GAMES/GOMOKU:$(PROGS)/games/gomoku/trunk/gomoku.asm \ + games/invaders:GAMES/INVADERS:$(PROGS)/games/invaders/invaders.asm \ + games/klavisha:GAMES/KLAVISHA:$(PROGS)/games/klavisha/trunk/klavisha.asm \ + games/lines:GAMES/LINES:$(PROGS)/games/lines/lines.asm \ + games/mblocks:GAMES/MBLOCKS:$(PROGS)/games/mblocks/trunk/mblocks.asm \ + games/msquare:GAMES/MSQUARE:$(PROGS)/games/MSquare/trunk/MSquare.asm \ + games/phenix:GAMES/PHENIX:$(PROGS)/games/phenix/trunk/phenix.asm \ + games/pipes:GAMES/PIPES:$(PROGS)/games/pipes/pipes.asm \ + games/pong:GAMES/PONG:$(PROGS)/games/pong/trunk/pong.asm \ + games/pong3:GAMES/PONG3:$(PROGS)/games/pong3/trunk/pong3.asm \ + games/rsquare:GAMES/RSQUARE:$(PROGS)/games/rsquare/trunk/rsquare.asm \ + games/soko:GAMES/SOKO:$(PROGS)/games/soko/trunk/SOKO.ASM \ + games/snake:GAMES/SNAKE:$(PROGS)/games/snake/trunk/snake.asm \ + games/sq_game:GAMES/SQ_GAME:$(PROGS)/games/sq_game/trunk/SQ_GAME.ASM \ + games/sudoku:GAMES/SUDOKU:$(PROGS)/games/sudoku/trunk/sudoku.asm \ + games/sw:GAMES/SW:$(PROGS)/games/sw/trunk/sw.asm \ + games/tanks:GAMES/TANKS:$(PROGS)/games/tanks/trunk/tanks.asm \ + games/tetris:GAMES/TETRIS:$(PROGS)/games/tetris/trunk/tetris.asm \ + lib/archiver.obj:LIB/ARCHIVER.OBJ:$(PROGS)/fs/kfar/trunk/kfar_arc/kfar_arc.asm \ + lib/box_lib.obj:LIB/BOX_LIB.OBJ:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/box_lib/trunk/box_lib.asm \ + lib/console.obj:LIB/CONSOLE.OBJ:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/console/console.asm \ + lib/libgfx.obj:LIB/LIBGFX.OBJ:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/libs-dev/libgfx/libgfx.asm \ + lib/libimg.obj:LIB/LIBIMG.OBJ:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/libs-dev/libimg/libimg.asm \ + lib/libini.obj:LIB/LIBINI.OBJ:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/libs-dev/libini/libini.asm \ + lib/libio.obj:LIB/LIBIO.OBJ:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/libs-dev/libio/libio.asm \ + lib/network.obj:LIB/NETWORK.OBJ:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/network/network.asm \ + lib/proc_lib.obj:LIB/PROC_LIB.OBJ:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/proc_lib/trunk/proc_lib.asm \ + lib/cnv_png.obj:LIB/CNV_PNG.OBJ:$(PROGS)/media/zsea/plugins/png/cnv_png.asm \ + media/animage:MEDIA/ANIMAGE:$(PROGS)/media/animage/trunk/animage.asm \ + media/cdp:MEDIA/CDP:$(PROGS)/media/cdp/trunk/cdp.asm \ + media/kiv:MEDIA/KIV:$(PROGS)/media/kiv/trunk/kiv.asm \ + media/listplay:MEDIA/LISTPLAY:$(PROGS)/media/listplay/trunk/listplay.asm \ + media/midamp:MEDIA/MIDAMP:$(PROGS)/media/midamp/trunk/midamp.asm \ + media/startmus:MEDIA/STARTMUS:$(PROGS)/media/startmus/trunk/STARTMUS.ASM \ + network/airc:NETWORK/AIRC:$(PROGS)/network/airc/trunk/airc.asm \ + network/arpstat:NETWORK/ARPSTAT:$(PROGS)/network/arpstat/trunk/arpstat.asm \ + network/chess:NETWORK/CHESS:$(PROGS)/network/chess/trunk/chess.asm \ + network/downloader:NETWORK/DOWNLOADER:$(PROGS)/network/downloader/trunk/downloader.asm \ + network/ethstat:NETWORK/ETHSTAT:$(PROGS)/network/ethstat/trunk/ethstat.asm \ + network/ftps:NETWORK/FTPS:$(PROGS)/network/ftps/trunk/FTPS.ASM \ + network/https:NETWORK/HTTPS:$(PROGS)/network/https/trunk/https.asm \ + network/nntpc:NETWORK/NNTPC:$(PROGS)/network/nntpc/trunk/nntpc.asm \ + network/nslookup:NETWORK/NSLOOKUP:$(PROGS)/develop/libraries/network/examples/nslookup.asm \ + network/popc:NETWORK/POPC:$(PROGS)/network/popc/trunk/popc.asm \ + network/smtps:NETWORK/SMTPS:$(PROGS)/network/smtps/trunk/smtps.asm \ + network/stackcfg:NETWORK/STACKCFG:$(PROGS)/network/stackcfg/trunk/stackcfg.asm \ + network/telnet:NETWORK/TELNET:$(PROGS)/network/telnet/trunk/telnet.asm \ + network/tftpc:NETWORK/TFTPC:$(PROGS)/network/tftpc/trunk/tftpc.asm \ + network/VNCclient:NETWORK/VNCclient:$(PROGS)/network/VNCclient/VNCclient.asm \ + network/ym:NETWORK/YM:$(PROGS)/network/ym/trunk/ym.asm \ + network/zeroconf:NETWORK/ZEROCONF:$(PROGS)/network/zeroconf/trunk/zeroconf.asm \ +# end of list +# The list of all FASM programs with one main FASM file for CD image. +# Format of an item is exactly the same as in the previous list. +FASM_PROGRAMS_CD:=\ + drivers/atikms:DRIVERS/ATIKMS:$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/video/drm/radeon/atikms.asm \ +# end of list + +# The list of all FASM programs which needs to be compiled without KPACKing. +FASM_NOKPACK_PROGRAMS:=\ + distr_data/9x2klbr.exe:-:$(PROGS)/hd_load/9x2klbr/9x2klbr.asm \ + distr_data/MeOSload.com:-:$(PROGS)/hd_load/meosload/MeOSload.asm \ + distr_data/mtldr:-:$(PROGS)/hd_load/mtldr/mtldr.asm \ + mtldr_for_installer:-:$(PROGS)/hd_load/mtldr_install/mtldr_code/mtldr.asm \ + distr_data/mtldr_install.exe:-:$(PROGS)/hd_load/mtldr_install/mtldr_install.asm \ + distr_data/MeOSload_for_usb_boot_old.com:-:$(PROGS)/hd_load/usb_boot_old/MeOSload.asm \ + distr_data/enable_for_usb_boot_old.exe:-:$(PROGS)/hd_load/usb_boot_old/enable.asm \ + distr_data/BOOT_F32.BIN:-:$(PROGS)/hd_load/usb_boot/BOOT_F32.ASM \ + distr_data/MTLD_F32:-:$(PROGS)/hd_load/usb_boot/mtldr.asm \ + distr_data/inst.exe:-:$(PROGS)/hd_load/usb_boot/inst.asm \ + distr_data/setmbr.exe:-:$(PROGS)/hd_load/usb_boot/setmbr.asm \ +#end of list + +# The list of all NASM programs with one main NASM file. +# Format of an item is exactly the same as in the previous list. +NASM_PROGRAMS:=\ + demos/aclock:DEMOS/ACLOCK:$(PROGS)/demos/aclock/trunk/aclock.asm \ + games/c4:GAMES/C4:$(PROGS)/games/c4/trunk/c4.asm \ +# end of list + +# The list of files which should be copied from somewhere. +# Format of an item is exactly the same as in the previous list. +COPY_FILES:=\ + macros.inc:MACROS.INC:$(PROGS)/macros.inc \ + config.inc:CONFIG.INC:$(PROGS)/config.inc \ + struct.inc:STRUCT.INC:$(PROGS)/struct.inc \ + develop/te_icon.png:DEVELOP/TE_ICON.PNG:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/te_icon.png \ + develop/tl_nod_16.png:DEVELOP/TL_NOD_16.PNG:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/tl_nod_16.png \ + develop/tl_sys_16.png:DEVELOP/TL_SYS_16.PNG:$(PROGS)/media/log_el/trunk/tl_sys_16.png \ + develop/t_edit.ini:DEVELOP/T_EDIT.INI:$(PROGS)/other/t_edit/t_edit.ini \ + File|Managers/z_icons.png:File|Managers/Z_ICONS.PNG:$(PROGS)/fs/opendial/z_icons.png \ + File|Managers/kfm_keys.txt:File|Managers/KFM_KEYS.TXT:$(PROGS)/fs/kfm/trunk/docs/english/kfm_keys.txt \ + File|Managers/buttons.bmp:File|Managers/BUTTONS.BMP:$(PROGS)/fs/kfm/trunk/buttons.bmp \ + File|Managers/icons.bmp:File|Managers/ICONS.BMP:$(PROGS)/fs/kfm/trunk/icons.bmp \ + fonts/litt.chr:FONTS/LITT.CHR:$(PROGS)/demos/bgitest/trunk/FONTS/LITT.CHR \ + games/snake.ini:GAMES/SNAKE.INI:$(PROGS)/games/snake/trunk/snake.ini \ + games/skin.raw:GAMES/SKIN.RAW:$(PROGS)/games/soko/trunk/SKIN.RAW \ + games/soko-4.lev:GAMES/SOKO-4.LEV:$(PROGS)/games/soko/trunk/SOKO-4.LEV \ + games/soko-5.lev:GAMES/SOKO-5.LEV:$(PROGS)/games/soko/trunk/SOKO-5.LEV \ + games/soko-6.lev:GAMES/SOKO-6.LEV:$(PROGS)/games/soko/trunk/SOKO-6.LEV \ + games/soko-7.lev:GAMES/SOKO-7.LEV:$(PROGS)/games/soko/trunk/SOKO-7.LEV \ + games/soko-8.lev:GAMES/SOKO-8.LEV:$(PROGS)/games/soko/trunk/SOKO-8.LEV \ + games/soko-9.lev:GAMES/SOKO-9.LEV:$(PROGS)/games/soko/trunk/SOKO-9.LEV \ + media/kiv.ini:MEDIA/KIV.INI:$(PROGS)/media/kiv/trunk/kiv.ini \ + .shell:.shell:$(PROGS)/system/shell/bin/eng/.shell \ + mykey.ini:MYKEY.INI:$(PROGS)/system/MyKey/trunk/mykey.ini \ +# end of list + +# The list of all C-- programs with one main C-- file. +# Format of an item is exactly the same as in the previous list, +# except that there can be fourth field with parameters for a compiler. +CMM_PROGRAMS:=\ + File|Managers/Eolite:File|Managers/EOLITE:$(PROGS)/fs/Eolite/trunk/Eolite.c-- \ + games/clicks:GAMES/CLICKS:$(PROGS)/games/clicks/trunk/clicks.c \ + games/FindNumbers:GAMES/FindNumbers:$(PROGS)/games/FindNumbers/trunk/FindNumbers.c-- \ + games/flood-it:GAMES/flood-it:$(PROGS)/games/flood-it/trunk/flood-it.c \ + games/mine:GAMES/MINE:$(PROGS)/games/mine/trunk/mine.c--:/MEOS \ + HTMLv:HTMLv:$(PROGS)/network/htmlv/browser/HTMLv.c \ +#develop/c--:DEVELOP/C--:$(PROGS)/develop/c--/trunk/32.c-- \ +# end of list + +# List of other files to be included in the image file. +# Some of them are auto-built with special rules, some just exist before build. +# Each item is of the form :. +# Spaces should be represented as |. +OTHER_FILES:=autorun.dat:AUTORUN.DAT \ + background.png:background.png default.skn:DEFAULT.SKN \ + e80:E80 graph:GRAPH hdread:HDREAD \ + icons.dat:ICONS.DAT iconstrp.png:ICONSTRP.PNG index_htm:INDEX.HTM \ + kernel.mnt:KERNEL.MNT kerpack:KERPACK keymap.key:KEYMAP.KEY \ + kuzkina.mid:KUZKINA.MID lang.inc:LANG.INC lang.ini:LANG.INI \ + menu.dat:MENU.DAT \ + panel.ini:PANEL.INI setup.dat:SETUP.DAT \ + shell:SHELL table:TABLE \ + vmode:VMODE 3d/3dsheart:3D/3DSHEART \ + 3d/cubeline:3D/CUBELINE 3d/gears:3D/GEARS 3d/house.3ds:3D/HOUSE.3DS \ + demos/ak47.lif:DEMOS/AK47.LIF \ + demos/barge.lif:DEMOS/BARGE.LIF demos/life2:DEMOS/LIFE2 \ + demos/relay.lif:DEMOS/RELAY.LIF demos/rpento.lif:DEMOS/RPENTO.LIF \ + demos/use_mb:DEMOS/USE_MB \ + File|Managers/eolite.ini:File|Managers/EOLITE.INI \ + File|Managers/icons.ini:File|Managers/ICONS.INI \ + File|Managers/kfar.ini:File|Managers/KFAR.INI \ + File|Managers/kfm.ini:File|Managers/KFM.INI \ + games/checkers:GAMES/CHECKERS \ + games/kosilka:GAMES/KOSILKA games/kosskin.gfx:GAMES/KOSSKIN.GFX \ + games/reversi:GAMES/REVERSI games/rforces:GAMES/RFORCES \ + games/xonix:GAMES/XONIX games/megamaze:GAMES/MEGAMAZE \ + lib/msgbox.obj:LIB/MSGBOX.OBJ \ + lib/pixlib.obj:LIB/PIXLIB.OBJ lib/sort.obj:LIB/SORT.OBJ \ + drivers/intel_hda.obj:DRIVERS/intel_hda.obj \ + media/ac97snd:MEDIA/AC97SND \ + network/jmail:NETWORK/JMAIL network/zeroconf.ini:NETWORK/ZEROCONF.INI \ +#end of list +#3d/logio.bmp:3D/LOGIO.BMP 3d/cubetext:3D/CUBETEXT + +# Generate skins list understandable by gnu make +Makefile.skins: $(REPOSITORY)/skins/authors.txt $(REPOSITORY)/data/generate_makefile_skins.sh + cut -f1 $< | $(SHELL) $(REPOSITORY)/data/generate_makefile_skins.sh > $@ +include Makefile.skins + +# Extra targets for LiveCD image in the syntax of mkisofs +MKISOFS_EXTRA:=\ + dosbox/=$(PROGS)/emulator/DosBox/dosbox \ + dosbox/=$(PROGS)/emulator/DosBox/dosbox.conf \ + dosbox/=$(PROGS)/emulator/DosBox/readme.txt \ + /=distr_data/autorun.inf \ + /=distr_data/KolibriOS_icon.ico \ + /=distr_data/readme.txt \ + Skins/=$(REPOSITORY)/skins/authors.txt \ + Docs/config.txt=docs/CONFIG.TXT \ + Docs/copying.txt=docs/COPYING.TXT \ + Docs/hot_keys.txt=docs/HOT_KEYS.TXT \ + Docs/install.txt=docs/INSTALL.TXT \ + Docs/readme.txt=docs/README.TXT \ + Docs/stack.txt=docs/STACK.TXT \ + Docs/sysfuncs.txt=docs/SYSFUNCS.TXT \ + HD_Load/9x2klbr/=distr_data/9x2klbr.exe \ + HD_Load/9x2klbr/=../common/HD_load/9x2klbr/LDKLBR.VXD \ + HD_Load/9x2klbr/=$(PROGS)/hd_load/9x2klbr/readme.txt \ + HD_Load/MeOSLoad/=distr_data/MeOSload.com \ + HD_Load/MeOSLoad/=$(PROGS)/hd_load/meosload/AUTOEXEC.BAT \ + HD_Load/MeOSLoad/=$(PROGS)/hd_load/meosload/CONFIG.SYS \ + HD_Load/MeOSLoad/=$(PROGS)/hd_load/meosload/L_readme.txt \ + HD_Load/MeOSLoad/=$(PROGS)/hd_load/meosload/L_readme_Win.txt \ + HD_Load/mtldr/=distr_data/mtldr \ + HD_Load/mtldr/install.txt=$(PROGS)/hd_load/mtldr/install_eng.txt \ + HD_Load/mtldr/=$(PROGS)/hd_load/mtldr/vista_install.bat \ + HD_Load/mtldr/=$(PROGS)/hd_load/mtldr/vista_remove.bat \ + HD_Load/=distr_data/mtldr_install.exe \ + HD_Load/memdisk=../common/HD_load/memdisk \ + HD_Load/USB_Boot/=distr_data/BOOT_F32.BIN \ + HD_Load/USB_Boot/=distr_data/MTLD_F32 \ + HD_Load/USB_Boot/=distr_data/inst.exe \ + HD_Load/USB_Boot/=distr_data/setmbr.exe \ + HD_Load/USB_Boot/readme.txt=$(PROGS)/hd_load/usb_boot/readme_eng.txt \ + HD_Load/USB_boot_old/=$(PROGS)/hd_load/usb_boot_old/usb_boot.rtf \ + HD_Load/USB_boot_old/=$(PROGS)/hd_load/usb_boot_old/usb_boot_866.txt \ + HD_Load/USB_boot_old/=$(PROGS)/hd_load/usb_boot_old/usb_boot_1251.txt \ + HD_Load/USB_boot_old/MeOSload.com=distr_data/MeOSload_for_usb_boot_old.com \ + HD_Load/USB_boot_old/enable.exe=distr_data/enable_for_usb_boot_old.exe \ + games/=../common/games \ + games/fara=games/fara \ + games/soko/soko=games/soko \ +#end of list + +# Some macro for convenient work. +# Macros for replacing '|' to escaped space '\ '. +space:=\ #plus space +respace=$(subst |,$(space),$(1)) +# Macro for selecting different parts of ':'-separated items. +binarypart=$(word 1,$(subst :, ,$(1))) +imagepart=$(word 2,$(subst :, ,$(1))) +sourcepart=$(word 3,$(subst :, ,$(1))) +parampart=$(word 4,$(subst :, ,$(1))) +# Get file names, possibly with spaces inside, from an item. +# Here $(f) is an item - in fact, macro argument. +fbinary=$(call respace,$(call binarypart,$(f))) +fimage=$(call respace,$(call imagepart,$(f))) +fsource=$(call respace,$(call sourcepart,$(f))) +fparam=$(call respace,$(call parampart,$(f))) + +# Define targets for image file. +# Join all the lists above. +targets_full:=$(COPY_FILES) $(FASM_PROGRAMS) $(NASM_PROGRAMS) $(OTHER_FILES) $(CMM_PROGRAMS) +# For each item in the united list call fbinary. +targets:=$(foreach f,$(targets_full),$(fbinary)) + +# Define a command for copying a file inside the image. +# mcopy_command is a macro with two parameters, +# local file name $(1) and image file name $(2). +# Note that spaces in these have to be escaped with backslashes. +mcopy_command=mcopy -moi $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img $(1) ::$(2) +# Specialize a previous command for an item $(f) in one of lists. +mcopy_item_command=$(call mcopy_command,$(fbinary),$(fimage)) + +# Join all $(mcopy_item_command) for all items, +# append newline after each item. +# The first newline character after "define" line and +# the last newline character before "endef" line get away +# with define/endef, so we make three newline characters, +# that is two empty lines, in order to get one in $(newline). +define newline + + +endef +mcopy_all_items:=$(foreach f,$(targets_full),$(mcopy_item_command)$(newline)) + +# add skins to MKISOFS_EXTRA +MKISOFS_EXTRA:=$(MKISOFS_EXTRA) $(foreach f,$(SKIN_SOURCES),$(call imagepart,$(f))=$(call binarypart,$(f))) +# dependencies of MKISOFS_EXTRA; we iterate through $(MKISOFS_EXTRA), +# substitute "=" with space, get the 2nd word and join all results +mkisofs_extra_targets:=$(call respace,$(foreach f,$(MKISOFS_EXTRA),$(word 2,$(subst =, ,$(f))))) + +# The first goal: floppy image. +$(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img: $(BUILD_DIR)/.dir \ + Makefile \ + $(BUILD_DIR)/boot_fat12.bin \ + $(targets) +# SYSXTREE +# 3d/CUBETEXT +# 3d/LOGIO.BMP + str=`date -u +"[auto-build %d %b %Y %R, r$(REV)]"`; \ + echo -n $$str|dd of=kernel.mnt bs=1 seek=`expr 279 - length "$$str"` conv=notrunc 2>/dev/null + dd if=/dev/zero of=$(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img count=2880 bs=512 2>&1 + mformat -f 1440 -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img :: + dd if=$(BUILD_DIR)/boot_fat12.bin of=$(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img count=1 bs=512 conv=notrunc 2>&1 + mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::3D + mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::DEMOS + mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::DEVELOP + mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::DEVELOP/INFO + mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::DRIVERS + mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::File\ Managers + mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::FONTS + mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::GAMES + mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::LIB + mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::MEDIA + mmd -i $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img ::NETWORK + $(mcopy_all_items) + +# The second goal: LiveCD image. +$(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.iso: $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img $(mkisofs_extra_targets) + mkisofs -U -J -pad -b kolibri.img -c boot.catalog -hide-joliet boot.catalog -graft-points \ + -A "KolibriOS AutoBuilder" -p "CleverMouse" -publisher "KolibriOS Team" -V "KolibriOS r$(REV)" -sysid "KOLIBRI" \ + -iso-level 3 -o $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.iso $(BUILD_DIR)/kolibri.img $(call respace,$(MKISOFS_EXTRA)) 2>&1 + +# Special targets to modify behaviour of make. +.DELETE_ON_ERROR: +.SUFFIXES: # delete all predefined rules + +# The floppy bootsector. +$(BUILD_DIR)/boot_fat12.bin: $(KERNEL)/bootloader/boot_fat12.asm $(KERNEL)/bootloader/floppy1440.inc + fasm $(KERNEL)/bootloader/boot_fat12.asm $(BUILD_DIR)/boot_fat12.bin + +$(BUILD_DIR)/.dir 3d/.dir demos/.dir develop/.dir develop/info/.dir drivers/.dir fonts/.dir \ + games/.dir lib/.dir media/.dir network/.dir allskins/.dir distr_data/.dir .deps/.dir: + mkdir -p $(dir $@) + touch $@ +develop/info/.dir: develop/.dir +File\ Managers/.dir: + mkdir -p "File Managers" + touch "File Managers/.dir" + +# extra dependency for mtldr_install.exe +distr_data/mtldr_install.exe: mtldr_for_installer + +# FASM black magic goes to Makefile.fasm. +include Makefile.fasm + +# Similar for NASM. +include Makefile.nasm + +# Similar for copying files. +include Makefile.copy + +# Special rules for copying sysfuncs.txt - it isn't directly included in the image. +docpack: $(DOCDIR)SYSFUNCS.TXT +$(DOCDIR)SYSFUNCS.TXT: $(KERNEL)/docs/sysfuncs.txt + cp $(KERNEL)/docs/sysfuncs.txt $(DOCDIR)SYSFUNCS.TXT + +# Similar for C--. +include Makefile.cmm + +# Sorry, even black magic seems to be insufficient for +# auto-handling all subtle effects. So we just define +# command lines for compiling and linking, and +# maintain the list of sources and objects by hand. +include Makefile.msvc + +# Rules for table +table: .obj.table/table.exe + $(msvc_final) +TABLE_OBJECTS:=.obj.table/calc.obj .obj.table/func.obj .obj.table/hello.obj \ + .obj.table/KosFile.obj .obj.table/kosSyst.obj .obj.table/math2.obj \ + .obj.table/mcsmemm.obj .obj.table/parser.obj +TABLE_H_FILES:=$(wildcard $(PROGS)/other/table/*.h) +.obj.table/table.exe: $(TABLE_OBJECTS) + $(msvc_link) +$(TABLE_OBJECTS): .obj.table/%.obj: $(PROGS)/other/table/%.cpp $(TABLE_H_FILES) Makefile.msvc | .obj.table + $(msvc_compile) +.obj.table: + mkdir -p .obj.table + +# Rules for graph +graph: .obj.graph/graph.exe + $(msvc_final) +GRAPH_CPP_OBJECTS:=.obj.graph/func.obj .obj.graph/hello.obj .obj.graph/kolibri.obj \ + .obj.graph/KosFile.obj .obj.graph/kosSyst.obj .obj.graph/math2.obj \ + .obj.graph/mcsmemm.obj .obj.graph/parser.obj +GRAPH_C_OBJECTS:=.obj.graph/string.obj +GRAPH_H_FILES:=$(wildcard $(PROGS)/other/graph/*.h) +GRAPH_FASM_OBJECTS:=.obj.graph/memcpy.obj .obj.graph/memset.obj +.obj.graph/graph.exe: $(GRAPH_CPP_OBJECTS) $(GRAPH_C_OBJECTS) $(GRAPH_FASM_OBJECTS) + $(msvc_link) +$(GRAPH_CPP_OBJECTS): .obj.graph/%.obj: $(PROGS)/other/graph/%.cpp $(GRAPH_H_FILES) Makefile.msvc | .obj.graph + $(msvc_compile) +$(GRAPH_C_OBJECTS): .obj.graph/%.obj: $(PROGS)/other/graph/%.c $(GRAPH_H_FILES) Makefile.msvc | .obj.graph + $(msvc_compile) +$(GRAPH_FASM_OBJECTS): .obj.graph/%.obj: $(PROGS)/other/graph/%.asm Makefile.msvc | .obj.graph + fasm $< $@ +.obj.graph: + mkdir -p .obj.graph + +# Rules for kosilka +games/kosilka: .obj.kosilka/kosilka.exe + $(msvc_final) +KOSILKA_OBJECTS:=.obj.kosilka/kosilka.obj .obj.kosilka/KosFile.obj .obj.kosilka/kosSyst.obj .obj.kosilka/mcsmemm.obj +KOSILKA_H_FILES:=$(PROGS)/games/kosilka/*.h +.obj.kosilka/kosilka.exe: $(KOSILKA_OBJECTS) + $(msvc_link) +$(KOSILKA_OBJECTS): .obj.kosilka/%.obj: $(PROGS)/games/kosilka/%.cpp $(KOSILKA_H_FILES) Makefile.msvc | .obj.kosilka + $(msvc_compile) +.obj.kosilka: + mkdir -p .obj.kosilka + +include Makefile.gcc + +# Rules for shell +shell: .obj.shell/start.o .obj.shell/shell.o .obj.shell/kolibri.o .obj.shell/stdlib.o .obj.shell/string.o .obj.shell/ctype.o \ + $(PROGS)/system/shell/kolibri.ld + $(call gcc_link,$(PROGS)/system/shell/kolibri.ld) +.obj.shell/shell.o: $(PROGS)/system/shell/shell.c \ + $(PROGS)/system/shell/all.h \ + $(PROGS)/system/shell/system/*.h \ + $(PROGS)/system/shell/cmd/*.c \ + $(PROGS)/system/shell/modules/*.c \ + $(PROGS)/system/shell/locale/rus/globals.h \ + Makefile.gcc | .obj.shell + $(gcc_compile) +.obj.shell/kolibri.o .obj.shell/stdlib.o .obj.shell/string.o .obj.shell/ctype.o: .obj.shell/%.o: \ + $(PROGS)/system/shell/system/%.c $(PROGS)/system/shell/system/*.h \ + Makefile.gcc | .obj.shell + $(gcc_compile) + win32-gcc -c -Os -o $@ $< +.obj.shell/start.o: $(PROGS)/system/shell/start.asm | .obj.shell + fasm $< $@ +.obj.shell: + mkdir -p .obj.shell + +# Rules for e80 +E80DIR=$(PROGS)/emulator/e80/trunk +e80: .obj.e80/start.o .obj.e80/kolibri.o .obj.e80/stdlib.o .obj.e80/string.o .obj.e80/z80.o .obj.e80/e80.o + $(call gcc_link,$(E80DIR)/kolibri.ld) +.obj.e80/e80.o: $(E80DIR)/e80.c $(E80DIR)/48.h \ + $(E80DIR)/system/*.h $(E80DIR)/system/msgbox.c \ + $(E80DIR)/z80/z80.h Makefile.gcc | .obj.e80 + $(gcc_compile) +.obj.e80/kolibri.o .obj.e80/stdlib.o .obj.e80/string.o: .obj.e80/%.o: \ + $(E80DIR)/system/%.c $(E80DIR)/system/*.h Makefile.gcc | .obj.e80 + $(gcc_compile) +.obj.e80/z80.o: $(E80DIR)/z80/z80.c $(E80DIR)/z80/* + $(gcc_compile) +.obj.e80/start.o: $(E80DIR)/asm_code.asm | .obj.e80 + fasm $< $@ +.obj.e80: + mkdir -p .obj.e80 + +# Rules for sdk/sound, used by media/ac97snd +SOUNDDIR=$(PROGS)/develop/sdk/trunk/sound/src +SOUND_OBJECTS:=$(patsubst $(SOUNDDIR)/%.asm,.sdk/%.obj,$(wildcard $(SOUNDDIR)/*.asm)) +SOUND_INC_FILES:=$(wildcard $(SOUNDDIR)/*.inc) +.sdk/sound.lib: $(SOUND_OBJECTS) + win32-link /lib /out:$@ $^ +$(SOUND_OBJECTS): .sdk/%.obj: $(SOUNDDIR)/%.asm $(SOUND_INC_FILES) | .sdk + fasm $< $@ +.sdk: + mkdir -p .sdk +# Rules for media/ac97snd +AC97DIR=$(PROGS)/media/ac97snd +media/ac97snd: .obj.ac97snd/ac97snd.exe + $(msvc_final) +.obj.ac97snd/ac97snd.exe: .obj.ac97snd/ac97wav.obj .obj.ac97snd/crt.obj .obj.ac97snd/k_lib.obj \ + .obj.ac97snd/mpg.lib .sdk/sound.lib .obj.ac97snd/ufmod.obj + $(msvc_link) +.obj.ac97snd/ac97wav.obj: $(AC97DIR)/ac97snd/ac97wav.c \ + $(AC97DIR)/kolibri.h $(AC97DIR)/ac97snd/ac97wav.h $(AC97DIR)/mpg/mpg123.h \ + $(AC97DIR)/sound.h $(AC97DIR)/ufmod-codec.h Makefile.msvc | .obj.ac97snd + $(msvc_compile) +.obj.ac97snd/crt.obj: $(AC97DIR)/ac97snd/crt.c $(AC97DIR)/ac97snd/crt.h Makefile.msvc | .obj.ac97snd + $(msvc_compile) +.obj.ac97snd/k_lib.obj: $(AC97DIR)/ac97snd/k_lib.asm $(AC97DIR)/ac97snd/proc32.inc | .obj.ac97snd + fasm $< $@ +.obj.ac97snd/ufmod.obj: $(AC97DIR)/ufmod-config.asm | .obj.ac97snd + fasm $< $@ -s .deps/ac97snd-ufmod.fas + prepsrc .deps/ac97snd-ufmod.fas /dev/stdout | \ + perl -n -e 's|\\|/|g;s| |\\ |g;push @a,$$1 if/^;include\\ \x27(.*?)\x27/;' \ + -e 'END{$$a=join " \\\n ",@a;print "$@: $$a\n$$a:\n"}' > .deps/ac97snd-ufmod.Po +-include .deps/ac97snd-ufmod.Po +AC97SND_MPG_C_FILES:=$(wildcard $(AC97DIR)/mpg/*.c) +AC97SND_MPG_H_FILES:=$(wildcard $(AC97DIR)/mpg/*.h) +AC97SND_MPG_C_OBJECTS:=$(patsubst $(AC97DIR)/mpg/%.c,.obj.ac97snd/%.o,$(AC97SND_MPG_C_FILES)) +.obj.ac97snd/mpg.lib: $(AC97SND_MPG_C_OBJECTS) .obj.ac97snd/pow.obj + win32-link /lib /ltcg /out:$@ $^ +$(AC97SND_MPG_C_OBJECTS): .obj.ac97snd/%.o: $(AC97DIR)/mpg/%.c $(AC97SND_MPG_H_FILES) Makefile.msvc | .obj.ac97snd + $(msvc_compile) +.obj.ac97snd/pow.obj: $(AC97DIR)/mpg/pow.asm $(AC97DIR)/mpg/proc32.inc | .obj.ac97snd + fasm $< $@ +.obj.ac97snd: + mkdir -p .obj.ac97snd + +# Rules for atikms.dll +# Use Makefile from $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ddk and $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/video/drm/radeon +# However, dependencies must be duplicated - I don't know how to avoid this +# without need to rebuild kolibri.img at every iteration... +# Note that we are going to write in the directory shared +# between all Makefiles, so we need locked operations. +drivers/atikms.dll: $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/video/drm/radeon/atikms.dll drivers/.dir + kpack --nologo $< $@ +$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/video/drm/radeon/atikms.dll: $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/video/drm/radeon/Makefile.lto + flock $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/video/drm/radeon/.lock \ + $(MAKE) CC=win32-gcc45 AS=win32-as LD=win32-ld AR=win32-ar FASM=fasm -C $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/video/drm/radeon -f Makefile.lto +$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ddk/libddk.a: $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ddk/Makefile + flock $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ddk/.lock \ + $(MAKE) CC=win32-gcc45 AS=win32-as LD=win32-ld AR=win32-ar FASM=fasm -C $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ddk libddk.a +$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ddk/libcore.a: $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ddk/Makefile + flock $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ddk/.lock \ + $(MAKE) CC=win32-gcc45 AS=win32-as LD=win32-ld AR=win32-ar FASM=fasm -C $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ddk libcore.a +# dependencies +$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/video/drm/radeon/atikms.dll: \ + $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/video/drm/radeon/atikms.lds \ + $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ddk/libddk.a \ + $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ddk/libcore.a \ + $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/video/drm/radeon/*.[Sch] \ + $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/video/drm/radeon/*.asm \ + $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/video/drm/radeon/Makefile \ + $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/video/drm/radeon/firmware/*.bin \ + $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/include/*.h \ + $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/include/*/*.h \ + $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/include/*/*/*.h \ + $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/include/*/*/*/*.h +$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ddk/libddk.a: \ + $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ddk/*/* \ + $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/include/*.h \ + $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/include/*/*.h \ + $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/include/*/*/*.h \ + $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/include/*/*/*/*.h +$(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ddk/libcore.a: \ + $(REPOSITORY)/drivers/ddk/core.S diff --git a/data/it/Makefile.cmm b/data/it/Makefile.cmm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..561f7e49aa --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/Makefile.cmm @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +# This is similar to Makefile.fasm, look there for comments. +# No dependency tracking, so force dependencies on all files +# in dir/* and dir/*/* +# Also, we cannot set output file name and need to guess +# whether c-- has created .com file or no-extension file. +define cmm_meta_rule +$(1): $(2) Makefile.cmm $$(call respace,$$(addsuffix .dir,$(3))) \ + $$(wildcard $$(dir $(2))*) $$(wildcard $$(dir $(2))*/*) + flock $$(dir $(2)).lock -c '\ + (cd "$$(dir $(2))" && win32-c-- /D=AUTOBUILD /D=LANG_ENG $(5) $$(notdir $(2)) >&2) && \ + if [ -e $$(basename $$<) ]; then f=$$(basename $$<); else f=$$(basename $$<).com; fi && \ + kpack --nologo $$$$f "$$@" && rm $$$$f' +endef + +$(foreach f,$(CMM_PROGRAMS),$(eval $(call cmm_meta_rule,$(fbinary),$(fsource),$(binarydir),$(progname),$(fparam)))) diff --git a/data/it/Makefile.copy b/data/it/Makefile.copy new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..538ecb4ef6 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/Makefile.copy @@ -0,0 +1,6 @@ +# This is similar to Makefile.fasm, look there for comments. +define copy_meta_rule +$(1): $(2) Makefile.copy $$(call respace,$$(addsuffix .dir,$(3))) + cp $$< "$$@" +endef +$(foreach f,$(COPY_FILES),$(eval $(call copy_meta_rule,$(fbinary),$(fsource),$(binarydir)))) diff --git a/data/it/Makefile.fasm b/data/it/Makefile.fasm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8f4c65dca9 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/Makefile.fasm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +# This is not a independent Makefile; it is auxiliary file +# included from main Makefile. +# It depends on the following variables and macro: +# $(FASM_PROGRAMS) is a list of all programs to build with FASM rule; +# $(binarypart) is a macro which converts from $(1)=item of $(FASM_PROGRAMS) +# to space-escaped full name of binary, $(respace) unescapes spaces; +# $(fbinary) and $(fsource) gives space-unescaped full name of binary +# and source (respectively) of $(f)=item of $(FASM_PROGRAMS). + +# Define the rule for all FASM programs. +# Yes, this looks like a black magic. +# But it is not so scary as it seems. +# First, we define "meta-rule" as a rule which is +# macro depending on $(fasmprog). +# Second, the construction foreach+eval creates +# usual rules, one for each $(fasmprog) in $(FASM_PROGRAMS). +# Note that meta-rule is double-expanded, first +# time as the arg of eval - it is the place where $(fasmprog) +# gets expanded - and second time as the rule; +# so all $ which are expected to expand at the second time should be escaped. +# And all $ which are expected to be expanded by the shell should be escaped +# twice, so they become $$$$. + +# The arguments of macro fasm_meta_rule: +# $(1) = name of binary file, +# $(2) = name of main source file. +# $(3) = folder of binary file - without spaces. +# $(4) = name of program - without path and extension, +define fasm_meta_rule +$(1): $(2) Makefile.fasm .deps/.dir $$(call respace,$$(addsuffix .dir,$(3))) + tmpfile=`mktemp --tmpdir build.XXXXXXXX` && \ + (fasm -m 65536 "$$<" "$$@" -s $$$$tmpfile && \ + fasmdep -e $$$$tmpfile > .deps/$(4).Po && \ + rm $$$$tmpfile) || (rm $$$$tmpfile; false) + kpack --nologo "$$@" +-include .deps/$(4).Po +endef + +define fasm_nokpack_meta_rule +$(1): $(2) Makefile.fasm .deps/.dir $$(call respace,$$(addsuffix .dir,$(3))) + tmpfile=`mktemp --tmpdir build.XXXXXXXX` && \ + (fasm -m 65536 "$$<" "$$@" -s $$$$tmpfile && \ + fasmdep -e $$$$tmpfile > .deps/$(4).Po && \ + rm $$$$tmpfile) || (rm $$$$tmpfile; false) +-include .deps/$(4).Po +endef + +progname=$(call respace,$(basename $(notdir $(call binarypart,$(f))))) +binarydir=$(subst ./,,$(dir $(call binarypart,$(f)))) +$(foreach f,$(FASM_PROGRAMS) $(FASM_PROGRAMS_CD) $(SKIN_SOURCES),$(eval $(call fasm_meta_rule,$(fbinary),$(fsource),$(binarydir),$(progname)))) +$(foreach f,$(FASM_NOKPACK_PROGRAMS),$(eval $(call fasm_nokpack_meta_rule,$(fbinary),$(fsource),$(binarydir),$(progname)))) + +# Rule for the kernel differs: it uses kerpack instead of kpack. +kernel.mnt: $(KERNEL)/kernel.asm Makefile.fasm .deps/.dir + tmpfile=`mktemp --tmpdir build.XXXXXXXX` && \ + (fasm -m 65536 "$<" "$@" -s $$tmpfile && \ + fasmdep -e $$tmpfile > .deps/kernel.Po && \ + rm $$tmpfile) || (rm $$tmpfile; false) + kerpack "$@" +-include .deps/kernel.Po diff --git a/data/it/Makefile.gcc b/data/it/Makefile.gcc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..14ae973a61 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/Makefile.gcc @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +define gcc_compile + win32-gcc -c -Os -DAUTOBUILD -DLANG_ENG=1 -o $@ $< +endef +define gcc_link + win32-ld -nostdlib -T $(1) -o "$@" $^ + win32-objcopy "$@" -O binary + kpack --nologo "$@" +endef diff --git a/data/it/Makefile.msvc b/data/it/Makefile.msvc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0902ceed22 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/Makefile.msvc @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +define msvc_compile +win32-cl /c /O2 /Os /Oy /GF /GS- /GR- /EHs-c- /fp:fast /GL /QIfist /Gr /DAUTOBUILD /Fo$@ Z:$< >&2 +endef +define msvc_link +win32-link /section:.bss,E /fixed:no /subsystem:native \ +/merge:.data=.text /merge:.rdata=.text /merge:.1seg=.text \ +/entry:crtStartUp /out:$@ /ltcg /nodefaultlib \ +$(addprefix Z:,$^) >&2 +endef +define msvc_final +EXENAME=$< fasm doexe2.asm "$@" +kpack --nologo "$@" +endef diff --git a/data/it/Makefile.nasm b/data/it/Makefile.nasm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cb4714fd21 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/Makefile.nasm @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +# This is similar to Makefile.fasm, look there for comments. +define nasm_meta_rule +.deps/$(4).Po: $(2) Makefile.nasm .deps/.dir + nasm -I$$(dir $(2)) -o "$(1)" -M $$< > .deps/$(4).Tpo 2>/dev/null; \ + if [ $$$$? -eq 0 ]; then perl -ln -e 'next unless $$$$_;' \ + -e 'm/((.*): )?(.*)/;$$$$a=$$$$2 if $$$$2;push @b,$$$$3;' \ + -e 'END{$$$$b=join "\n",@b;print "$$$$a .deps/$(4).Po: $$$$b\n$$$$b:"}' \ + .deps/$(4).Tpo > .deps/$(4).Po; fi + rm -f .deps/$(4).Tpo +$(1): $(2) Makefile.nasm $$(call respace,$$(addsuffix .dir,$(3))) + nasm -I$$(dir $(2)) -o "$$@" $$< + kpack --nologo "$$@" +-include .deps/$(4).Po +endef + +$(foreach f,$(NASM_PROGRAMS),$(eval $(call nasm_meta_rule,$(fbinary),$(fsource),$(binarydir),$(progname)))) diff --git a/data/it/autorun.dat b/data/it/autorun.dat new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8549750a7d --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/autorun.dat @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +# Syntaxis is: +# Use "parameter value" for parameters with spaces. Use "" if no parameter is required. +# Delay time means how much the system should wait, before running the next line. It is measured in 1/100 seconds. +# If delay is negative, wait for termination of the spawned process. Otherwise, simply wait +# +#/RD/1/CROPFLAT "XS800 YS480" 1 # set limits of screen +/RD/1/refrscrn "" 1 # Refresh screen +/RD/1/COMMOUSE "" 1 # COM mice detector +/RD/1/MEDIA/KIV \T__background.png -1 # Desktop background image +/RD/1/@CLIP "" 1 # Clipboard +/RD/1/@RB "" 1 # Desktop right-click menu +/RD/1/@SS ASSM 1 # Screensaver +/RD/1/@PANEL "" 1 # Start panel +#/RD/1/DEVELOP/BOARD "" 1 # Load DEBUG board +/RD/1/SETUP BOOT 1 # Load device settings +/RD/1/ICON BOOT 1 # Multithread icon +/RD/1/NETWORK/ZEROCONF "" 1 # Network configuration +### Hello, ASM World! ### diff --git a/data/it/background.png b/data/it/background.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..20d0f90f9c Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/background.png differ diff --git a/data/it/default.skn b/data/it/default.skn new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e6b4f208e5 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/default.skn differ diff --git a/data/it/demos/ak47.lif b/data/it/demos/ak47.lif new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9338b986ce --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/demos/ak47.lif @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +#Life 1.05 +#D AK47, a gun at 47 gens/shot. +#D The AK47 reaction (middle) +#D by Richard Schroeppel was +#D known for years before +#D stabilizers were found by +#D Paul Callahan in July 1994. +#D See also P94S. +#N +#P -23 -11 +...** +..*..* +.*.*..* +.*.*...* +**.*.****** +...*..*.* +...***.*..* +.**...*.*.* +*..*.**.* +.**...*.** +...**....* +...*.*...* +**.*.....** +.*.*.** +.*.*..* +..*..* +...** +#P -6 -12 +**.......* +**.....*** +......* +......** +. +...*** +..*...* +.*.....* +.*.....* +.*.....* +..*...* +...*** +. +. +. +. +. +. +. +. +. +....** +.....* +..***.....** +..*.......** +#P 12 -5 +......** +.....*..* +....*.**.* +.*...*.*.* +.*...*.*.** +*......* +..*..*** +..*.....** +..*.**.*..* +.**.*...** +**...*** +.**....* +**..**.*.** +....**.*.* +....*..*.* +.....*..* +......** diff --git a/data/it/demos/barge.lif b/data/it/demos/barge.lif new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..be6317d4f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/demos/barge.lif @@ -0,0 +1,406 @@ +#Life 1.05 +#D c/3 spaceship extensible in 2 dimensions +#D Hartmut Holzwart, David Bell +#N +#P -32 -50 +...* +..*.* +.** +..* +.*.* +.* +* +*.* +*.* +.**** +...*.* +...*.* +..* +..*** +* +*** +.***.* +...* +...* +...** +#P -29 -29 +** +*..* +*.** +.*** +.** +...* +.** +..*.* +...* +. +...* +..*.* +.** +...* +.** +.*** +*.** +*..* +** +. +** +*..* +*.** +.*** +.** +...* +.** +..*.* +...* +. +...* +..*.* +.** +...* +.** +.*** +*.** +*..* +** +. +** +*..* +*.** +.*** +.** +...* +.** +..*.* +...* +. +...* +..*.* +.** +...* +.** +.*** +*.** +*..* +** +#P -32 31 +...** +...* +...* +.***.* +*** +* +..*** +..* +...*.* +...*.* +.**** +*.* +*.* +* +.* +.*.* +..* +.** +..*.* +...* +#P -24 -29 +..**.*.*.* +.*...*..** +*.....* +.*......*.* +...**..**.* +..*...* +..*.***...* +..* +...******** +. +...******** +..* +..*.***...* +..*...* +...**..**.* +.*......*.* +*.....* +.*...*..** +..**.*.*.* +. +..**.*.*.* +.*...*..** +*.....* +.*......*.* +...**..**.* +..*...* +..*.***...* +..* +...******** +. +...******** +..* +..*.***...* +..*...* +...**..**.* +.*......*.* +*.....* +.*...*..** +..**.*.*.* +. +..**.*.*.* +.*...*..** +*.....* +.*......*.* +...**..**.* +..*...* +..*.***...* +..* +...******** +. +...******** +..* +..*.***...* +..*...* +...**..**.* +.*......*.* +*.....* +.*...*..** +..**.*.*.* +#P -12 -29 +..**.*.*.* +.*...*..** +*.....* +.*......*.* +...**..**.* +..*...* +..*.***...* +..* +...******** +. +...******** +..* +..*.***...* +..*...* +...**..**.* +.*......*.* +*.....* +.*...*..** +..**.*.*.* +. +..**.*.*.* +.*...*..** +*.....* +.*......*.* +...**..**.* +..*...* +..*.***...* +..* +...******** +. +...******** +..* +..*.***...* +..*...* +...**..**.* +.*......*.* +*.....* +.*...*..** +..**.*.*.* +. +..**.*.*.* +.*...*..** +*.....* +.*......*.* +...**..**.* +..*...* +..*.***...* +..* +...******** +. +...******** +..* +..*.***...* +..*...* +...**..**.* +.*......*.* +*.....* +.*...*..** +..**.*.*.* +#P 0 -29 +..**.*.*.* +.*...*..** +*.....* +.*......*.* +...**..**.* +..*...* +..*.***...* +..* +...******** +. +...******** +..* +..*.***...* +..*...* +...**..**.* +.*......*.* +*.....* +.*...*..** +..**.*.*.* +. +..**.*.*.* +.*...*..** +*.....* +.*......*.* +...**..**.* +..*...* +..*.***...* +..* +...******** +. +...******** +..* +..*.***...* +..*...* +...**..**.* +.*......*.* +*.....* +.*...*..** +..**.*.*.* +. +..**.*.*.* +.*...*..** +*.....* +.*......*.* +...**..**.* +..*...* +..*.***...* +..* +...******** +. +...******** +..* +..*.***...* +..*...* +...**..**.* +.*......*.* +*.....* +.*...*..** +..**.*.*.* +#P 12 -29 +..**.*.*.* +.*...*..** +*.....* +.*......*.* +...**..**.* +..*...* +..*.***...* +..* +...******** +. +...******** +..* +..*.***...* +..*...* +...**..**.* +.*......*.* +*.....* +.*...*..** +..**.*.*.* +. +..**.*.*.* +.*...*..** +*.....* +.*......*.* +...**..**.* +..*...* +..*.***...* +..* +...******** +. +...******** +..* +..*.***...* +..*...* +...**..**.* +.*......*.* +*.....* +.*...*..** +..**.*.*.* +. +..**.*.*.* +.*...*..** +*.....* +.*......*.* +...**..**.* +..*...* +..*.***...* +..* +...******** +. +...******** +..* +..*.***...* +..*...* +...**..**.* +.*......*.* +*.....* +.*...*..** +..**.*.*.* +#P 24 -29 +..**.*.*.* +.*...*..** +*.....* +.*......*.* +...**..**.* +..*...* +..*.***...* +..* +...******** +. +...******** +..* +..*.***...* +..*...* +...**..**.* +.*......*.* +*.....* +.*...*..** +..**.*.*.* +. +..**.*.*.* +.*...*..** +*.....* +.*......*.* +...**..**.* +..*...* +..*.***...* +..* +...******** +. +...******** +..* +..*.***...* +..*...* +...**..**.* +.*......*.* +*.....* +.*...*..** +..**.*.*.* +. +..**.*.*.* +.*...*..** +*.....* +.*......*.* +...**..**.* +..*...* +..*.***...* +..* +...******** +. +...******** +..* +..*.***...* +..*...* +...**..**.* +.*......*.* +*.....* +.*...*..** +..**.*.*.* diff --git a/data/it/demos/life2 b/data/it/demos/life2 new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e1c677d85f Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/demos/life2 differ diff --git a/data/it/demos/relay.lif b/data/it/demos/relay.lif new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d62865cdf6 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/demos/relay.lif @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +#Life 1.05 +#D Relay between two pentadecathlons +#D Well known. +#N +#P -17 -2 +********** +#P -1 0 +* +.** +** +#P 8 2 +********** diff --git a/data/it/demos/rpento.lif b/data/it/demos/rpento.lif new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b392fb045d --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/demos/rpento.lif @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +#Life 1.05 +#D r-pentomino +#D A small, vigorous, common pattern. +#D +#D When the Game of Life was first +#D introduced around 1970, this was +#D proposed as the smallest pattern +#D for which the outcome was unknown. +#N +#P 3 3 +.** +** +.* diff --git a/data/it/demos/use_mb b/data/it/demos/use_mb new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c395975c23 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/demos/use_mb differ diff --git a/data/it/distr_data/KolibriOS_icon.ico b/data/it/distr_data/KolibriOS_icon.ico new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fcba0849d9 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/distr_data/KolibriOS_icon.ico differ diff --git a/data/it/distr_data/autorun.inf b/data/it/distr_data/autorun.inf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a3c071e7c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/distr_data/autorun.inf @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +[AutoRun] +icon=KolibriOS_icon.ico +shellexecute=readme.txt \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/it/distr_data/readme.txt b/data/it/distr_data/readme.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a3381ca761 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/distr_data/readme.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +Kolibri OS 0.7.7.0+ night build, LiveCD-version. + +Questo è un CD bootabile. Per eseguire il contenuto, riavvia il computer e +imposta nel BIOS l'avvio da CD. + +Le modifiche fate da Kolibri x.y.z.t sono descritte nel file readme.txt +nella cartella docs oppure all'interno del sistema operativo nel docpack +delle applicazioni. + +Le istruzioni per installare il sistema su altri media e i requisiti +minimi sono descritti nel file install.ttx + +Le istruzioni per configurare il sistema si possono trovare nel file +config.txt. diff --git a/data/it/docs/CONFIG.TXT b/data/it/docs/CONFIG.TXT new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6244132456 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/docs/CONFIG.TXT @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +È possibile impostare alcune configurazioni all'interno di KolibriOS. +Questo file funge da guida e descrive come personalizzare il sistema. + +Per modificare le impostazione è necessario modificare i file nella memoria +RAM. Se si sta eseguendo KolibriOS da floppy, allora è possibile modificare +i file direttamente da floppy. Se invece si sta usando una immagine kolibri.img +del disco floppy, allora è possibile usare un programma in grado di modificare +i file su immagini del disco, oppure salvare le modifiche direttamente da +KolibriOS con l'applicazione rdsave, oppure durante lo spegnimento del sistema. + +Tra parentesi vengono riportati i nomi degli eseguibili dei singoli programmi. + +1. Sfondo del desktop. //testare i tre metodi + a) Modificare nel file autorun.dat (si tratta di un file di testo) + il parametro "\T__background.jpg" con il nome del nuovo file immagine + (può essere un file jpg, bmp, gif o png). Una volta che è stato impostato + come nuovo sfondo è possibile eliminare il file background.jpg + + b) Modificare all'interno del file autorun.dat la voce + "/RD/1/KIV \S__background.jpg" in "/rd/1/PIC4". È possibile + eliminare il file background.jpg e il nuovo sfondo sara una texture. + + Per i programmatori: + È possibile cambiare texture e colori all'interno del file pic4.asm + * per modificare la texture: modificare il valore della variabile + usearray (stringa 585) da ptarray a ptarray2, ptarray3, ... o + ptarray9 + * per cambiare colore: nella procedura check_parameters cercare la + stringa con il commento appropriato (stringa 127) e aggiungere a + 0x40000 1 o 2. + Dopo le modifiche ricompilare pic4 con fasm e comprimerlo con kpack, + infine inserire il file in RAM. + + c) I due metodi descritti precedentemente permettevano di modificare lo + sfondo a lungo termine (fino alla prossima reinstallazzione). È + possibile modificare lo sfondo durante l'esecuzione di KolibriOS fino + al prossimo riavvio con i programma Visualizzatore Immagini (kiv), + Gestore icone (icon), generatore di sfondi (pic4) oppure il programma + frattale (tinyfrac). + +2. Configurare il menu di sistema. + Le voci relative al menu sono salvate nel file di testo menu.dat. È + possibile modificare tale file con un editor di testo qualsiasi. Se + si sta usando il programma TINYPAD di KolibriOS allora è necessario + disabilitare la voce "optimal fill on saving" dal menu opzioni. + +3. Configurare i programmi in avvio automatico. + La lista dei programmi caricati durante l'avvio del sistema è salvata + nel file di testo autorun.dat. È possibile modificare tale lista con + un editor di testo qualsiasi. + +4. Icone sul desktop. + La lista delle icone sul dekstop è salvata nel file di testo icons.dat, + per modificare tale file è consigliato usare il programma icon manager. + Le immagini delle icone sono salvate nel file iconstrp.gif, per + modificarlo è necessario usare un editor grafico. + + +5. Colori e temi. + È possibile visualizzare e modificare l'interfaccia (skin) dinamicamente + con l'applicazione "Colori e temi" (desktop). È possibile rendere + permanenti i cambiamenti modificando o sostituendo il file default.skn, + dal quale viene caricato durante l'avvio il tema. È possibile trovare + temi alternativi nella cartella skins. Altrimenti è possibile creare + temi propri, per i dettagli è consigliato vedere i sorgenti presenti + nella cartella skins. + +6. Suono. //non trovo sis7012 + I driver sound.obj, sono compatibili con le schede audio Intel ICH, + ICH0, ICH2, ICH3, ICH4, ICH5, ICH6, ICH7 e NVidia NForce, NForce 2, + NForce 3, NForce 4. + Se si ha una scheda audio compatibile con SB16, allora è necessario + rimuovere il file sound.obj dal ram Disk e rinominare il file sb16.obj + dalla cartella 'drivers' in sound.obj. + Se si ha una scheda audio sis7012, è necessario rinominare il file sis.obj + dalla cartella radice del floppy, e copiarlo nella cartella driver nella ram, + sostituendo il vecchio file. + Il driver fm801.obj serve per le schede audio ForceMedia FM801, il + driver vt8235.obj per i chipset VIA e i driver emu10k1x.obj per gli + audioprocessori EMU10K1X. La loro inizializzazione è analoga quella del + file sis7012, è necessario copiarli nella cartella drivers, rinominadoli + in sis.obj e rimuovendo il vecchio file. + +7. Bus Disconnect. + La applicazione KBD (Kolibri Bus Disconnect), permette di disconnettere + il bus del processore per abbassare la sua temperatura. Un effetto + collaterale è del rumore nei codec AC97. L'applicazione può essere + caricata automaticamente all'avvio del sistema, in tal caso è necessario + aggiungere la voce +"/RD/1/KBD BOOT 20 # Enable Bus Disconnect for AMD K7 processors". + al file autorun.dat + +8. Impostazioni Network. + le impostazioni iniziali sono lette durante l'avvio del sistema dal file + /rd/1/network/zeroconf.ini. + È possibile impostare il rivelamento automatico con DHCP ("type=zeroconf") + oppure impostare un indirizzo IP fissato ("type=static"). + +9. Configurazione video per schede video ATI. + I driver per le schede video ATI possono impostare la risoluzione dello + schermo e il parametro di refresh durante l'avvio del sistema, se + supportate. La lista completa dei modelli supportati è ottenibile dal + programma VMODE, è inoltre possibile impostare manualmente i parametri + desiderati. + Per impostare i parametri durante l'avvio è necessario passare tramite + il file AUTORUN.DAT l'argomento -mxx al + driver ATIKMS, ad esempio +/RD/1/DRIVERS/ATIKMS -m1024x768x60 -1 + Attenzione al fatto che il formato autorun.dat non accetta spazi, + quindi non è possibile inserire ulteriori argomenti. + Si può inoltre disabilitare la possibilità di modificare i parametri durante l'avvio passando l'opzione -n. I driver supportano comunque il cursore hardware. Per disabilitare completamente il driver è sufficiente rimuovere la relativa voce dal file autorun.dat. diff --git a/data/it/docs/COPYING.TXT b/data/it/docs/COPYING.TXT new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f6213b69c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/docs/COPYING.TXT @@ -0,0 +1,347 @@ + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + + Version 2, June 1991 + + + Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA + + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + + Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to +using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by +the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you +distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and +(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, +distribute and/or modify the software. + + Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so +that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original +authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the +program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + + TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + + + 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains +a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, +refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program +is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the +Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + + 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; +and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License +along with the Program. + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + + 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices + stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + + b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in + whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any + part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third + parties under the terms of this License. + + c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively + when run, you must cause it, when started running for such + interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an + announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a + notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide + a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under + these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this + License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but + does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on + the Program is not required to print an announcement.) + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program +with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + + 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + + a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable + source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections + 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, + + b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three + years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your + cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete + machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be + distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium + customarily used for software interchange; or, + + c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer + to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is + allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you + received the program in object code or executable form with such + an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + + 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. +However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under +this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + + 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + + 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to +these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + + 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to +apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + + 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + + 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any +later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of +this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software +Foundation. + + 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author +to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free +Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes +make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals +of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and +of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + + NO WARRANTY + + 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY +FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN +OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES +PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED +OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS +TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE +PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, +REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR +REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, +INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING +OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY +YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER +PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + + END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + + If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest +possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it +free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + + To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest +to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively +convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least +the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + + + Copyright (C) 19yy + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software + Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + +If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this +when it starts in an interactive mode: + + Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author + Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. + This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it + under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. + +The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate +parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may +be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be +mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program. + +You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your +school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if +necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: + + Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program + `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. + + , 1 April 1989 + Ty Coon, President of Vice + +This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into +proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may +consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the +library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General +Public License instead of this License. diff --git a/data/it/docs/FARA.TXT b/data/it/docs/FARA.TXT new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8b07306e3b --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/docs/FARA.TXT @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + PHARAOH TOMB + +Lo scopo di questo gioco è quello di aprire un passaggio muovendo i +geroglifici per entrare nella stanza (8x8) successiva. È possibile +scambiare due geroglifici adiacenti se dopo tale azioni sono presente +almeno tre simboli in fila (orizzontale o verticale). +Se viene creata una tale sequenza, questa sparisce facendo spazio a dei +nuovi geroglifici, creati in modo casuale, che "cadono" dall'alto. +Ogni volta che vengono fatti sparire dei geroglifici si ricevono dei +punti calcolati dalla formula max(L+(L+1)^(N-3), 20*L*N), dove N è il +numero di geroglifici rimossi e L è il livello. +Per passare al livello al livello successivo è necessario rimuovere +alcuni geroglifici particolari, che variano da livello a livello. Nel +pannello inferiore è indicato quanti ne sono stati rimossi, e quanti +sono i rimanenti. + +1o livello - 500 +2o livello - 450 +3o livello - 400 +4o livello - 350 +5o livello - 300 +6o livello e superirio - 50*(L+1) + + +Nel 1o livello vi sono 6 tipi di geroglifici differenti, ad ogni +livello si aggiunge un nuovo tipo, ma mai più di dieci (quindi dal 5o +livello in poi saranno 10 tipi, senza considerare quelli speciali). + +A partire dal 2o livello, per ogni combinazione di 4 o più +geroglifici, ed ogni volta che si passa un quarto di livello, il +giocatore riceve un geroglifico bonus da sostituire quando preferisce +con un altro geroglifico. + +A partire dal 3o livello, per ogni combinazione di 5 o più +geroglifici, e per ogni volta che si completa un terzo del livello, il +giocatore ottiene una "chiave universale" in grado di risolvere +qualsiasi combinazione di geroglifici e che può essere quindi usata per +risolvere in un colpo più combinazioni. + +A partire dal 4o livello, per ogni combinazione di 6 o più +geroglifici, e quando si completa mezzo livello, il giocatore ottiene +uno "space crooker", che gli permette, quando usato, di fare tre mosse +(non per forza in successione) diagonali. + +Il giocatore non può salvare più di un geroglifico (1 usuale, 1 joker e +1 crooker). + +Il gioco termina quando il giocatore non può effettuare movimenti che +gli permettono di eliminare geroglifici con quelli attualmente in gioco. diff --git a/data/it/docs/FASM.TXT b/data/it/docs/FASM.TXT new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e5665e667c --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/docs/FASM.TXT @@ -0,0 +1,4723 @@ + + ,''' + ,,;,, ,,,, ,,,,, ,,, ,, + ; ; ; ; ; ; + ; ,''''; '''', ; ; ; + ; ',,,,;, ,,,,,' ; ; ; + + flat assembler 1.70 + Programmer's Manual + + +Table of contents +----------------- + +Chapter 1 Introduction + + 1.1 Compiler overview + 1.1.1 System requirements + 1.1.2 Executing compiler from command line + 1.1.3 Compiler messages + 1.1.4 Output formats + + 1.2 Assembly syntax + 1.2.1 Instruction syntax + 1.2.2 Data definitions + 1.2.3 Constants and labels + 1.2.4 Numerical expressions + 1.2.5 Jumps and calls + 1.2.6 Size settings + +Chapter 2 Instruction set + + 2.1 The x86 architecture instructions + 2.1.1 Data movement instructions + 2.1.2 Type conversion instructions + 2.1.3 Binary arithmetic instructions + 2.1.4 Decimal arithmetic instructions + 2.1.5 Logical instructions + 2.1.6 Control transfer instructions + 2.1.7 I/O instructions + 2.1.8 Strings operations + 2.1.9 Flag control instructions + 2.1.10 Conditional operations + 2.1.11 Miscellaneous instructions + 2.1.12 System instructions + 2.1.13 FPU instructions + 2.1.14 MMX instructions + 2.1.15 SSE instructions + 2.1.16 SSE2 instructions + 2.1.17 SSE3 instructions + 2.1.18 AMD 3DNow! instructions + 2.1.19 The x86-64 long mode instructions + 2.1.20 SSE4 instructions + 2.1.21 AVX instructions + 2.1.22 AVX2 instructions + 2.1.23 Auxiliary sets of computational instructions + 2.1.24 Other extensions of instruction set + + 2.2 Control directives + 2.2.1 Numerical constants + 2.2.2 Conditional assembly + 2.2.3 Repeating blocks of instructions + 2.2.4 Addressing spaces + 2.2.5 Other directives + 2.2.6 Multiple passes + + 2.3 Preprocessor directives + 2.3.1 Including source files + 2.3.2 Symbolic constants + 2.3.3 Macroinstructions + 2.3.4 Structures + 2.3.5 Repeating macroinstructions + 2.3.6 Conditional preprocessing + 2.3.7 Order of processing + + 2.4 Formatter directives + 2.4.1 MZ executable + 2.4.2 Portable Executable + 2.4.3 Common Object File Format + 2.4.4 Executable and Linkable Format + + + +Chapter 1 Introduction +----------------------- + +This chapter contains all the most important information you need to begin +using the flat assembler. If you are experienced assembly language programmer, +you should read at least this chapter before using this compiler. + + +1.1 Compiler overview + +Flat assembler is a fast assembly language compiler for the x86 architecture +processors, which does multiple passes to optimize the size of generated +machine code. It is self-compilable and versions for different operating +systems are provided. All the versions are designed to be used from the system +command line and they should not differ in behavior. + + +1.1.1 System requirements + +All versions require the x86 architecture 32-bit processor (at least 80386), +although they can produce programs for the x86 architecture 16-bit processors, +too. DOS version requires an OS compatible with MS DOS 2.0 and either true +real mode environment or DPMI. Windows version requires a Win32 console +compatible with 3.1 version. + + +1.1.2 Executing compiler from command line + +To execute flat assembler from the command line you need to provide two +parameters - first should be name of source file, second should be name of +destination file. If no second parameter is given, the name for output +file will be guessed automatically. After displaying short information about +the program name and version, compiler will read the data from source file and +compile it. When the compilation is successful, compiler will write the +generated code to the destination file and display the summary of compilation +process; otherwise it will display the information about error that occurred. + The source file should be a text file, and can be created in any text +editor. Line breaks are accepted in both DOS and Unix standards, tabulators +are treated as spaces. + In the command line you can also include "-m" option followed by a number, +which specifies how many kilobytes of memory flat assembler should maximally +use. In case of DOS version this options limits only the usage of extended +memory. The "-p" option followed by a number can be used to specify the limit +for number of passes the assembler performs. If code cannot be generated +within specified amount of passes, the assembly will be terminated with an +error message. The maximum value of this setting is 65536, while the default +limit, used when no such option is included in command line, is 100. +It is also possible to limit the number of passes the assembler +performs, with the "-p" option followed by a number specifying the maximum +number of passes. + There are no command line options that would affect the output of compiler, +flat assembler requires only the source code to include the information it +really needs. For example, to specify output format you specify it by using +the "format" directive at the beginning of source. + + +1.1.3 Compiler messages + +As it is stated above, after the successful compilation, the compiler displays +the compilation summary. It includes the information of how many passes was +done, how much time it took, and how many bytes were written into the +destination file. +The following is an example of the compilation summary: + +flat assembler version 1.70 (16384 kilobytes memory) +38 passes, 5.3 seconds, 77824 bytes. + +In case of error during the compilation process, the program will display an +error message. For example, when compiler can't find the input file, it will +display the following message: + +flat assembler version 1.70 (16384 kilobytes memory) +error: source file not found. + +If the error is connected with a specific part of source code, the source line +that caused the error will be also displayed. Also placement of this line in +the source is given to help you finding this error, for example: + +flat assembler version 1.70 (16384 kilobytes memory) +example.asm [3]: + mob ax,1 +error: illegal instruction. + +It means that in the third line of the "example.asm" file compiler has +encountered an unrecognized instruction. When the line that caused error +contains a macroinstruction, also the line in macroinstruction definition +that generated the erroneous instruction is displayed: + +flat assembler version 1.70 (16384 kilobytes memory) +example.asm [6]: + stoschar 7 +example.asm [3] stoschar [1]: + mob al,char +error: illegal instruction. + +It means that the macroinstruction in the sixth line of the "example.asm" file +generated an unrecognized instruction with the first line of its definition. + + +1.1.4 Output formats + +By default, when there is no "format" directive in source file, flat +assembler simply puts generated instruction codes into output, creating this +way flat binary file. By default it generates 16-bit code, but you can always +turn it into the 16-bit or 32-bit mode by using "use16" or "use32" directive. +Some of the output formats switch into 32-bit mode, when selected - more +information about formats which you can choose can be found in 2.4. + All output code is always in the order in which it was entered into the +source file. + + +1.2 Assembly syntax + +The information provided below is intended mainly for the assembler +programmers that have been using some other assembly compilers before. +If you are beginner, you should look for the assembly programming tutorials. + Flat assembler by default uses the Intel syntax for the assembly +instructions, although you can customize it using the preprocessor +capabilities (macroinstructions and symbolic constants). It also has its own +set of the directives - the instructions for compiler. + All symbols defined inside the sources are case-sensitive. + + +1.2.1 Instruction syntax + +Instructions in assembly language are separated by line breaks, and one +instruction is expected to fill the one line of text. If a line contains +a semicolon, except for the semicolons inside the quoted strings, the rest of +this line is the comment and compiler ignores it. If a line ends with "\" +character (eventually the semicolon and comment may follow it), the next line +is attached at this point. + Each line in source is the sequence of items, which may be one of the three +types. One type are the symbol characters, which are the special characters +that are individual items even when are not spaced from the other ones. +Any of the "+-*/=<>()[]{}:,|&~#`" is the symbol character. The sequence of +other characters, separated from other items with either blank spaces or +symbol characters, is a symbol. If the first character of symbol is either a +single or double quote, it integrates any sequence of characters following it, +even the special ones, into a quoted string, which should end with the same +character, with which it began (the single or double quote) - however if there +are two such characters in a row (without any other character between them), +they are integrated into quoted string as just one of them and the quoted +string continues then. The symbols other than symbol characters and quoted +strings can be used as names, so are also called the name symbols. + Every instruction consists of the mnemonic and the various number of +operands, separated with commas. The operand can be register, immediate value +or a data addressed in memory, it can also be preceded by size operator to +define or override its size (table 1.1). Names of available registers you can +find in table 1.2, their sizes cannot be overridden. Immediate value can be +specified by any numerical expression. + When operand is a data in memory, the address of that data (also any +numerical expression, but it may contain registers) should be enclosed in +square brackets or preceded by "ptr" operator. For example instruction +"mov eax,3" will put the immediate value 3 into the EAX register, instruction +"mov eax,[7]" will put the 32-bit value from the address 7 into EAX and the +instruction "mov byte [7],3" will put the immediate value 3 into the byte at +address 7, it can also be written as "mov byte ptr 7,3". To specify which +segment register should be used for addressing, segment register name followed +by a colon should be put just before the address value (inside the square +brackets or after the "ptr" operator). + + Table 1.1 Size operators + /-------------------------\ + | Operator | Bits | Bytes | + |==========|======|=======| + | byte | 8 | 1 | + | word | 16 | 2 | + | dword | 32 | 4 | + | fword | 48 | 6 | + | pword | 48 | 6 | + | qword | 64 | 8 | + | tbyte | 80 | 10 | + | tword | 80 | 10 | + | dqword | 128 | 16 | + | xword | 128 | 16 | + | qqword | 256 | 32 | + | yword | 256 | 32 | + \-------------------------/ + + Table 1.2 Registers + /-----------------------------------------------------------------\ + | Type | Bits | | + |=========|======|================================================| + | | 8 | al cl dl bl ah ch dh bh | + | General | 16 | ax cx dx bx sp bp si di | + | | 32 | eax ecx edx ebx esp ebp esi edi | + |---------|------|------------------------------------------------| + | Segment | 16 | es cs ss ds fs gs | + |---------|------|------------------------------------------------| + | Control | 32 | cr0 cr2 cr3 cr4 | + |---------|------|------------------------------------------------| + | Debug | 32 | dr0 dr1 dr2 dr3 dr6 dr7 | + |---------|------|------------------------------------------------| + | FPU | 80 | st0 st1 st2 st3 st4 st5 st6 st7 | + |---------|------|------------------------------------------------| + | MMX | 64 | mm0 mm1 mm2 mm3 mm4 mm5 mm6 mm7 | + |---------|------|------------------------------------------------| + | SSE | 128 | xmm0 xmm1 xmm2 xmm3 xmm4 xmm5 xmm6 xmm7 | + |---------|------|------------------------------------------------| + | AVX | 256 | ymm0 ymm1 ymm2 ymm3 ymm4 ymm5 ymm6 ymm7 | + \-----------------------------------------------------------------/ + + +1.2.2 Data definitions + +To define data or reserve a space for it, use one of the directives listed in +table 1.3. The data definition directive should be followed by one or more of +numerical expressions, separated with commas. These expressions define the +values for data cells of size depending on which directive is used. For +example "db 1,2,3" will define the three bytes of values 1, 2 and 3 +respectively. + The "db" and "du" directives also accept the quoted string values of any +length, which will be converted into chain of bytes when "db" is used and into +chain of words with zeroed high byte when "du" is used. For example "db 'abc'" +will define the three bytes of values 61, 62 and 63. + The "dp" directive and its synonym "df" accept the values consisting of two +numerical expressions separated with colon, the first value will become the +high word and the second value will become the low double word of the far +pointer value. Also "dd" accepts such pointers consisting of two word values +separated with colon, and "dt" accepts the word and quad word value separated +with colon, the quad word is stored first. The "dt" directive with single +expression as parameter accepts only floating point values and creates data in +FPU double extended precision format. + Any of the above directive allows the usage of special "dup" operator to +make multiple copies of given values. The count of duplicates should precede +this operator and the value to duplicate should follow - it can even be the +chain of values separated with commas, but such set of values needs to be +enclosed with parenthesis, like "db 5 dup (1,2)", which defines five copies +of the given two byte sequence. + The "file" is a special directive and its syntax is different. This +directive includes a chain of bytes from file and it should be followed by the +quoted file name, then optionally numerical expression specifying offset in +file preceded by the colon, and - also optionally - comma and numerical +expression specifying count of bytes to include (if no count is specified, all +data up to the end of file is included). For example "file 'data.bin'" will +include the whole file as binary data and "file 'data.bin':10h,4" will include +only four bytes starting at offset 10h. + The data reservation directive should be followed by only one numerical +expression, and this value defines how many cells of the specified size should +be reserved. All data definition directives also accept the "?" value, which +means that this cell should not be initialized to any value and the effect is +the same as by using the data reservation directive. The uninitialized data +may not be included in the output file, so its values should be always +considered unknown. + + Table 1.3 Data directives + /----------------------------\ + | Size | Define | Reserve | + | (bytes) | data | data | + |=========|========|=========| + | 1 | db | rb | + | | file | | + |---------|--------|---------| + | 2 | dw | rw | + | | du | | + |---------|--------|---------| + | 4 | dd | rd | + |---------|--------|---------| + | 6 | dp | rp | + | | df | rf | + |---------|--------|---------| + | 8 | dq | rq | + |---------|--------|---------| + | 10 | dt | rt | + \----------------------------/ + + +1.2.3 Constants and labels + +In the numerical expressions you can also use constants or labels instead of +numbers. To define the constant or label you should use the specific +directives. Each label can be defined only once and it is accessible from the +any place of source (even before it was defined). Constant can be redefined +many times, but in this case it is accessible only after it was defined, and +is always equal to the value from last definition before the place where it's +used. When a constant is defined only once in source, it is - like the label - +accessible from anywhere. + The definition of constant consists of name of the constant followed by the +"=" character and numerical expression, which after calculation will become +the value of constant. This value is always calculated at the time the +constant is defined. For example you can define "count" constant by using the +directive "count = 17", and then use it in the assembly instructions, like +"mov cx,count" - which will become "mov cx,17" during the compilation process. + There are different ways to define labels. The simplest is to follow the +name of label by the colon, this directive can even be followed by the other +instruction in the same line. It defines the label whose value is equal to +offset of the point where it's defined. This method is usually used to label +the places in code. The other way is to follow the name of label (without a +colon) by some data directive. It defines the label with value equal to +offset of the beginning of defined data, and remembered as a label for data +with cell size as specified for that data directive in table 1.3. + The label can be treated as constant of value equal to offset of labeled +code or data. For example when you define data using the labeled directive +"char db 224", to put the offset of this data into BX register you should use +"mov bx,char" instruction, and to put the value of byte addressed by "char" +label to DL register, you should use "mov dl,[char]" (or "mov dl,ptr char"). +But when you try to assemble "mov ax,[char]", it will cause an error, because +fasm compares the sizes of operands, which should be equal. You can force +assembling that instruction by using size override: "mov ax,word [char]", but +remember that this instruction will read the two bytes beginning at "char" +address, while it was defined as a one byte. + The last and the most flexible way to define labels is to use "label" +directive. This directive should be followed by the name of label, then +optionally size operator (it can be preceded by a colon) and then - also +optionally "at" operator and the numerical expression defining the address at +which this label should be defined. For example "label wchar word at char" +will define a new label for the 16-bit data at the address of "char". Now the +instruction "mov ax,[wchar]" will be after compilation the same as +"mov ax,word [char]". If no address is specified, "label" directive defines +the label at current offset. Thus "mov [wchar],57568" will copy two bytes +while "mov [char],224" will copy one byte to the same address. + The label whose name begins with dot is treated as local label, and its name +is attached to the name of last global label (with name beginning with +anything but dot) to make the full name of this label. So you can use the +short name (beginning with dot) of this label anywhere before the next global +label is defined, and in the other places you have to use the full name. Label +beginning with two dots are the exception - they are like global, but they +don't become the new prefix for local labels. + The "@@" name means anonymous label, you can have defined many of them in +the source. Symbol "@b" (or equivalent "@r") references the nearest preceding +anonymous label, symbol "@f" references the nearest following anonymous label. +These special symbol are case-insensitive. + + +1.2.4 Numerical expressions + +In the above examples all the numerical expressions were the simple numbers, +constants or labels. But they can be more complex, by using the arithmetical +or logical operators for calculations at compile time. All these operators +with their priority values are listed in table 1.4. The operations with higher +priority value will be calculated first, you can of course change this +behavior by putting some parts of expression into parenthesis. The "+", "-", +"*" and "/" are standard arithmetical operations, "mod" calculates the +remainder from division. The "and", "or", "xor", "shl", "shr" and "not" +perform the same logical operations as assembly instructions of those names. +The "rva" and "plt" are special unary operators that perform conversions +between different kinds of addresses, they can be used only with few of the +output formats and their meaning may vary (see 2.4). + The arithmetical and logical calculations are usually processed as if they +operated on infinite precision 2-adic numbers, and assembler signalizes an +overflow error if because of its limitations it is not table to perform the +required calculation, or if the result is too large number to fit in either +signed or unsigned range for the destination unit size. However "not", "xor" +and "shr" operators are exceptions from this rule - if the value specified +by numerical expression has to fit in a unit of specified size, and the +arguments for operation fit into that size, the operation will be performed +with precision limited to that size. + The numbers in the expression are by default treated as a decimal, binary +numbers should have the "b" letter attached at the end, octal number should +end with "o" letter, hexadecimal numbers should begin with "0x" characters +(like in C language) or with the "$" character (like in Pascal language) or +they should end with "h" letter. Also quoted string, when encountered in +expression, will be converted into number - the first character will become +the least significant byte of number. + The numerical expression used as an address value can also contain any of +general registers used for addressing, they can be added and multiplied by +appropriate values, as it is allowed for the x86 architecture instructions. + There are also some special symbols that can be used inside the numerical +expression. First is "$", which is always equal to the value of current +offset, while "$$" is equal to base address of current addressing space. The +other one is "%", which is the number of current repeat in parts of code that +are repeated using some special directives (see 2.2). There's also "%t" +symbol, which is always equal to the current time stamp. + Any numerical expression can also consist of single floating point value +(flat assembler does not allow any floating point operations at compilation +time) in the scientific notation, they can end with the "f" letter to be +recognized, otherwise they should contain at least one of the "." or "E" +characters. So "1.0", "1E0" and "1f" define the same floating point value, +while simple "1" defines an integer value. + + Table 1.4 Arithmetical and logical operators by priority + /-------------------------\ + | Priority | Operators | + |==========|==============| + | 0 | + - | + |----------|--------------| + | 1 | * / | + |----------|--------------| + | 2 | mod | + |----------|--------------| + | 3 | and or xor | + |----------|--------------| + | 4 | shl shr | + |----------|--------------| + | 5 | not | + |----------|--------------| + | 6 | rva plt | + \-------------------------/ + + +1.2.5 Jumps and calls + +The operand of any jump or call instruction can be preceded not only by the +size operator, but also by one of the operators specifying type of the jump: +"short", "near" of "far". For example, when assembler is in 16-bit mode, +instruction "jmp dword [0]" will become the far jump and when assembler is +in 32-bit mode, it will become the near jump. To force this instruction to be +treated differently, use the "jmp near dword [0]" or "jmp far dword [0]" form. + When operand of near jump is the immediate value, assembler will generate +the shortest variant of this jump instruction if possible (but will not create +32-bit instruction in 16-bit mode nor 16-bit instruction in 32-bit mode, +unless there is a size operator stating it). By specifying the jump type +you can force it to always generate long variant (for example "jmp near 0") +or to always generate short variant and terminate with an error when it's +impossible (for example "jmp short 0"). + + +1.2.6 Size settings + +When instruction uses some memory addressing, by default the smallest form of +instruction is generated by using the short displacement if only address +value fits in the range. This can be overridden using the "word" or "dword" +operator before the address inside the square brackets (or after the "ptr" +operator), which forces the long displacement of appropriate size to be made. +In case when address is not relative to any registers, those operators allow +also to choose the appropriate mode of absolute addressing. + Instructions "adc", "add", "and", "cmp", "or", "sbb", "sub" and "xor" with +first operand being 16-bit or 32-bit are by default generated in shortened +8-bit form when the second operand is immediate value fitting in the range +for signed 8-bit values. It also can be overridden by putting the "word" or +"dword" operator before the immediate value. The similar rules applies to the +"imul" instruction with the last operand being immediate value. + Immediate value as an operand for "push" instruction without a size operator +is by default treated as a word value if assembler is in 16-bit mode and as a +double word value if assembler is in 32-bit mode, shorter 8-bit form of this +instruction is used if possible, "word" or "dword" size operator forces the +"push" instruction to be generated in longer form for specified size. "pushw" +and "pushd" mnemonics force assembler to generate 16-bit or 32-bit code +without forcing it to use the longer form of instruction. + + +Chapter 2 Instruction set +-------------------------- + +This chapter provides the detailed information about the instructions and +directives supported by flat assembler. Directives for defining labels were +already discussed in 1.2.3, all other directives will be described later in +this chapter. + + +2.1 The x86 architecture instructions + +In this section you can find both the information about the syntax and +purpose the assembly language instructions. If you need more technical +information, look for the Intel Architecture Software Developer's Manual. + Assembly instructions consist of the mnemonic (instruction's name) and from +zero to three operands. If there are two or more operands, usually first is +the destination operand and second is the source operand. Each operand can be +register, memory or immediate value (see 1.2 for details about syntax of +operands). After the description of each instruction there are examples +of different combinations of operands, if the instruction has any. + Some instructions act as prefixes and can be followed by other instruction +in the same line, and there can be more than one prefix in a line. Each name +of the segment register is also a mnemonic of instruction prefix, altough it +is recommended to use segment overrides inside the square brackets instead of +these prefixes. + + +2.1.1 Data movement instructions + +"mov" transfers a byte, word or double word from the source operand to the +destination operand. It can transfer data between general registers, from +the general register to memory, or from memory to general register, but it +cannot move from memory to memory. It can also transfer an immediate value to +general register or memory, segment register to general register or memory, +general register or memory to segment register, control or debug register to +general register and general register to control or debug register. The "mov" +can be assembled only if the size of source operand and size of destination +operand are the same. Below are the examples for each of the allowed +combinations: + + mov bx,ax ; general register to general register + mov [char],al ; general register to memory + mov bl,[char] ; memory to general register + mov dl,32 ; immediate value to general register + mov [char],32 ; immediate value to memory + mov ax,ds ; segment register to general register + mov [bx],ds ; segment register to memory + mov ds,ax ; general register to segment register + mov ds,[bx] ; memory to segment register + mov eax,cr0 ; control register to general register + mov cr3,ebx ; general register to control register + + "xchg" swaps the contents of two operands. It can swap two byte operands, +two word operands or two double word operands. Order of operands is not +important. The operands may be two general registers, or general register +with memory. For example: + + xchg ax,bx ; swap two general registers + xchg al,[char] ; swap register with memory + + "push" decrements the stack frame pointer (ESP register), then transfers +the operand to the top of stack indicated by ESP. The operand can be memory, +general register, segment register or immediate value of word or double word +size. If operand is an immediate value and no size is specified, it is by +default treated as a word value if assembler is in 16-bit mode and as a double +word value if assembler is in 32-bit mode. "pushw" and "pushd" mnemonics are +variants of this instruction that store the values of word or double word size +respectively. If more operands follow in the same line (separated only with +spaces, not commas), compiler will assemble chain of the "push" instructions +with these operands. The examples are with single operands: + + push ax ; store general register + push es ; store segment register + pushw [bx] ; store memory + push 1000h ; store immediate value + + "pusha" saves the contents of the eight general register on the stack. +This instruction has no operands. There are two version of this instruction, +one 16-bit and one 32-bit, assembler automatically generates the appropriate +version for current mode, but it can be overridden by using "pushaw" or +"pushad" mnemonic to always get the 16-bit or 32-bit version. The 16-bit +version of this instruction pushes general registers on the stack in the +following order: AX, CX, DX, BX, the initial value of SP before AX was pushed, +BP, SI and DI. The 32-bit version pushes equivalent 32-bit general registers +in the same order. + "pop" transfers the word or double word at the current top of stack to the +destination operand, and then increments ESP to point to the new top of stack. +The operand can be memory, general register or segment register. "popw" and +"popd" mnemonics are variants of this instruction for restoring the values of +word or double word size respectively. If more operands separated with spaces +follow in the same line, compiler will assemble chain of the "pop" +instructions with these operands. + + pop bx ; restore general register + pop ds ; restore segment register + popw [si] ; restore memory + + "popa" restores the registers saved on the stack by "pusha" instruction, +except for the saved value of SP (or ESP), which is ignored. This instruction +has no operands. To force assembling 16-bit or 32-bit version of this +instruction use "popaw" or "popad" mnemonic. + + +2.1.2 Type conversion instructions + +The type conversion instructions convert bytes into words, words into double +words, and double words into quad words. These conversions can be done using +the sign extension or zero extension. The sign extension fills the extra bits +of the larger item with the value of the sign bit of the smaller item, the +zero extension simply fills them with zeros. + "cwd" and "cdq" double the size of value AX or EAX register respectively +and store the extra bits into the DX or EDX register. The conversion is done +using the sign extension. These instructions have no operands. + "cbw" extends the sign of the byte in AL throughout AX, and "cwde" extends +the sign of the word in AX throughout EAX. These instructions also have no +operands. + "movsx" converts a byte to word or double word and a word to double word +using the sign extension. "movzx" does the same, but it uses the zero +extension. The source operand can be general register or memory, while the +destination operand must be a general register. For example: + + movsx ax,al ; byte register to word register + movsx edx,dl ; byte register to double word register + movsx eax,ax ; word register to double word register + movsx ax,byte [bx] ; byte memory to word register + movsx edx,byte [bx] ; byte memory to double word register + movsx eax,word [bx] ; word memory to double word register + + +2.1.3 Binary arithmetic instructions + +"add" replaces the destination operand with the sum of the source and +destination operands and sets CF if overflow has occurred. The operands may +be bytes, words or double words. The destination operand can be general +register or memory, the source operand can be general register or immediate +value, it can also be memory if the destination operand is register. + + add ax,bx ; add register to register + add ax,[si] ; add memory to register + add [di],al ; add register to memory + add al,48 ; add immediate value to register + add [char],48 ; add immediate value to memory + + "adc" sums the operands, adds one if CF is set, and replaces the destination +operand with the result. Rules for the operands are the same as for the "add" +instruction. An "add" followed by multiple "adc" instructions can be used to +add numbers longer than 32 bits. + "inc" adds one to the operand, it does not affect CF. The operand can be a +general register or memory, and the size of the operand can be byte, word or +double word. + + inc ax ; increment register by one + inc byte [bx] ; increment memory by one + + "sub" subtracts the source operand from the destination operand and replaces +the destination operand with the result. If a borrow is required, the CF is +set. Rules for the operands are the same as for the "add" instruction. + "sbb" subtracts the source operand from the destination operand, subtracts +one if CF is set, and stores the result to the destination operand. Rules for +the operands are the same as for the "add" instruction. A "sub" followed by +multiple "sbb" instructions may be used to subtract numbers longer than 32 +bits. + "dec" subtracts one from the operand, it does not affect CF. Rules for the +operand are the same as for the "inc" instruction. + "cmp" subtracts the source operand from the destination operand. It updates +the flags as the "sub" instruction, but does not alter the source and +destination operands. Rules for the operands are the same as for the "sub" +instruction. + "neg" subtracts a signed integer operand from zero. The effect of this +instructon is to reverse the sign of the operand from positive to negative or +from negative to positive. Rules for the operand are the same as for the "inc" +instruction. + "xadd" exchanges the destination operand with the source operand, then loads +the sum of the two values into the destination operand. Rules for the operands +are the same as for the "add" instruction. + All the above binary arithmetic instructions update SF, ZF, PF and OF flags. +SF is always set to the same value as the result's sign bit, ZF is set when +all the bits of result are zero, PF is set when low order eight bits of result +contain an even number of set bits, OF is set if result is too large for a +positive number or too small for a negative number (excluding sign bit) to fit +in destination operand. + "mul" performs an unsigned multiplication of the operand and the +accumulator. If the operand is a byte, the processor multiplies it by the +contents of AL and returns the 16-bit result to AH and AL. If the operand is a +word, the processor multiplies it by the contents of AX and returns the 32-bit +result to DX and AX. If the operand is a double word, the processor multiplies +it by the contents of EAX and returns the 64-bit result in EDX and EAX. "mul" +sets CF and OF when the upper half of the result is nonzero, otherwise they +are cleared. Rules for the operand are the same as for the "inc" instruction. + "imul" performs a signed multiplication operation. This instruction has +three variations. First has one operand and behaves in the same way as the +"mul" instruction. Second has two operands, in this case destination operand +is multiplied by the source operand and the result replaces the destination +operand. Destination operand must be a general register, it can be word or +double word, source operand can be general register, memory or immediate +value. Third form has three operands, the destination operand must be a +general register, word or double word in size, source operand can be general +register or memory, and third operand must be an immediate value. The source +operand is multiplied by the immediate value and the result is stored in the +destination register. All the three forms calculate the product to twice the +size of operands and set CF and OF when the upper half of the result is +nonzero, but second and third form truncate the product to the size of +operands. So second and third forms can be also used for unsigned operands +because, whether the operands are signed or unsigned, the lower half of the +product is the same. Below are the examples for all three forms: + + imul bl ; accumulator by register + imul word [si] ; accumulator by memory + imul bx,cx ; register by register + imul bx,[si] ; register by memory + imul bx,10 ; register by immediate value + imul ax,bx,10 ; register by immediate value to register + imul ax,[si],10 ; memory by immediate value to register + + "div" performs an unsigned division of the accumulator by the operand. +The dividend (the accumulator) is twice the size of the divisor (the operand), +the quotient and remainder have the same size as the divisor. If divisor is +byte, the dividend is taken from AX register, the quotient is stored in AL and +the remainder is stored in AH. If divisor is word, the upper half of dividend +is taken from DX, the lower half of dividend is taken from AX, the quotient is +stored in AX and the remainder is stored in DX. If divisor is double word, +the upper half of dividend is taken from EDX, the lower half of dividend is +taken from EAX, the quotient is stored in EAX and the remainder is stored in +EDX. Rules for the operand are the same as for the "mul" instruction. + "idiv" performs a signed division of the accumulator by the operand. +It uses the same registers as the "div" instruction, and the rules for +the operand are the same. + + +2.1.4 Decimal arithmetic instructions + +Decimal arithmetic is performed by combining the binary arithmetic +instructions (already described in the prior section) with the decimal +arithmetic instructions. The decimal arithmetic instructions are used to +adjust the results of a previous binary arithmetic operation to produce a +valid packed or unpacked decimal result, or to adjust the inputs to a +subsequent binary arithmetic operation so the operation will produce a valid +packed or unpacked decimal result. + "daa" adjusts the result of adding two valid packed decimal operands in +AL. "daa" must always follow the addition of two pairs of packed decimal +numbers (one digit in each half-byte) to obtain a pair of valid packed +decimal digits as results. The carry flag is set if carry was needed. +This instruction has no operands. + "das" adjusts the result of subtracting two valid packed decimal operands +in AL. "das" must always follow the subtraction of one pair of packed decimal +numbers (one digit in each half-byte) from another to obtain a pair of valid +packed decimal digits as results. The carry flag is set if a borrow was +needed. This instruction has no operands. + "aaa" changes the contents of register AL to a valid unpacked decimal +number, and zeroes the top four bits. "aaa" must always follow the addition +of two unpacked decimal operands in AL. The carry flag is set and AH is +incremented if a carry is necessary. This instruction has no operands. + "aas" changes the contents of register AL to a valid unpacked decimal +number, and zeroes the top four bits. "aas" must always follow the +subtraction of one unpacked decimal operand from another in AL. The carry flag +is set and AH decremented if a borrow is necessary. This instruction has no +operands. + "aam" corrects the result of a multiplication of two valid unpacked decimal +numbers. "aam" must always follow the multiplication of two decimal numbers +to produce a valid decimal result. The high order digit is left in AH, the +low order digit in AL. The generalized version of this instruction allows +adjustment of the contents of the AX to create two unpacked digits of any +number base. The standard version of this instruction has no operands, the +generalized version has one operand - an immediate value specifying the +number base for the created digits. + "aad" modifies the numerator in AH and AL to prepare for the division of two +valid unpacked decimal operands so that the quotient produced by the division +will be a valid unpacked decimal number. AH should contain the high order +digit and AL the low order digit. This instruction adjusts the value and +places the result in AL, while AH will contain zero. The generalized version +of this instruction allows adjustment of two unpacked digits of any number +base. Rules for the operand are the same as for the "aam" instruction. + + +2.1.5 Logical instructions + +"not" inverts the bits in the specified operand to form a one's complement +of the operand. It has no effect on the flags. Rules for the operand are the +same as for the "inc" instruction. + "and", "or" and "xor" instructions perform the standard logical operations. +They update the SF, ZF and PF flags. Rules for the operands are the same as +for the "add" instruction. + "bt", "bts", "btr" and "btc" instructions operate on a single bit which can +be in memory or in a general register. The location of the bit is specified +as an offset from the low order end of the operand. The value of the offset +is the taken from the second operand, it either may be an immediate byte or +a general register. These instructions first assign the value of the selected +bit to CF. "bt" instruction does nothing more, "bts" sets the selected bit to +1, "btr" resets the selected bit to 0, "btc" changes the bit to its +complement. The first operand can be word or double word. + + bt ax,15 ; test bit in register + bts word [bx],15 ; test and set bit in memory + btr ax,cx ; test and reset bit in register + btc word [bx],cx ; test and complement bit in memory + + "bsf" and "bsr" instructions scan a word or double word for first set bit +and store the index of this bit into destination operand, which must be +general register. The bit string being scanned is specified by source operand, +it may be either general register or memory. The ZF flag is set if the entire +string is zero (no set bits are found); otherwise it is cleared. If no set bit +is found, the value of the destination register is undefined. "bsf" scans from +low order to high order (starting from bit index zero). "bsr" scans from high +order to low order (starting from bit index 15 of a word or index 31 of a +double word). + + bsf ax,bx ; scan register forward + bsr ax,[si] ; scan memory reverse + + "shl" shifts the destination operand left by the number of bits specified +in the second operand. The destination operand can be byte, word, or double +word general register or memory. The second operand can be an immediate value +or the CL register. The processor shifts zeros in from the right (low order) +side of the operand as bits exit from the left side. The last bit that exited +is stored in CF. "sal" is a synonym for "shl". + + shl al,1 ; shift register left by one bit + shl byte [bx],1 ; shift memory left by one bit + shl ax,cl ; shift register left by count from cl + shl word [bx],cl ; shift memory left by count from cl + + "shr" and "sar" shift the destination operand right by the number of bits +specified in the second operand. Rules for operands are the same as for the +"shl" instruction. "shr" shifts zeros in from the left side of the operand as +bits exit from the right side. The last bit that exited is stored in CF. +"sar" preserves the sign of the operand by shifting in zeros on the left side +if the value is positive or by shifting in ones if the value is negative. + "shld" shifts bits of the destination operand to the left by the number +of bits specified in third operand, while shifting high order bits from the +source operand into the destination operand on the right. The source operand +remains unmodified. The destination operand can be a word or double word +general register or memory, the source operand must be a general register, +third operand can be an immediate value or the CL register. + + shld ax,bx,1 ; shift register left by one bit + shld [di],bx,1 ; shift memory left by one bit + shld ax,bx,cl ; shift register left by count from cl + shld [di],bx,cl ; shift memory left by count from cl + + "shrd" shifts bits of the destination operand to the right, while shifting +low order bits from the source operand into the destination operand on the +left. The source operand remains unmodified. Rules for operands are the same +as for the "shld" instruction. + "rol" and "rcl" rotate the byte, word or double word destination operand +left by the number of bits specified in the second operand. For each rotation +specified, the high order bit that exits from the left of the operand returns +at the right to become the new low order bit. "rcl" additionally puts in CF +each high order bit that exits from the left side of the operand before it +returns to the operand as the low order bit on the next rotation cycle. Rules +for operands are the same as for the "shl" instruction. + "ror" and "rcr" rotate the byte, word or double word destination operand +right by the number of bits specified in the second operand. For each rotation +specified, the low order bit that exits from the right of the operand returns +at the left to become the new high order bit. "rcr" additionally puts in CF +each low order bit that exits from the right side of the operand before it +returns to the operand as the high order bit on the next rotation cycle. +Rules for operands are the same as for the "shl" instruction. + "test" performs the same action as the "and" instruction, but it does not +alter the destination operand, only updates flags. Rules for the operands are +the same as for the "and" instruction. + "bswap" reverses the byte order of a 32-bit general register: bits 0 through +7 are swapped with bits 24 through 31, and bits 8 through 15 are swapped with +bits 16 through 23. This instruction is provided for converting little-endian +values to big-endian format and vice versa. + + bswap edx ; swap bytes in register + + +2.1.6 Control transfer instructions + +"jmp" unconditionally transfers control to the target location. The +destination address can be specified directly within the instruction or +indirectly through a register or memory, the acceptable size of this address +depends on whether the jump is near or far (it can be specified by preceding +the operand with "near" or "far" operator) and whether the instruction is +16-bit or 32-bit. Operand for near jump should be "word" size for 16-bit +instruction or the "dword" size for 32-bit instruction. Operand for far jump +should be "dword" size for 16-bit instruction or "pword" size for 32-bit +instruction. A direct "jmp" instruction includes the destination address as +part of the instruction (and can be preceded by "short", "near" or "far" +operator), the operand specifying address should be the numerical expression +for near or short jump, or two numerical expressions separated with colon for +far jump, the first specifies selector of segment, the second is the offset +within segment. The "pword" operator can be used to force the 32-bit far call, +and "dword" to force the 16-bit far call. An indirect "jmp" instruction +obtains the destination address indirectly through a register or a pointer +variable, the operand should be general register or memory. See also 1.2.5 for +some more details. + + jmp 100h ; direct near jump + jmp 0FFFFh:0 ; direct far jump + jmp ax ; indirect near jump + jmp pword [ebx] ; indirect far jump + + "call" transfers control to the procedure, saving on the stack the address +of the instruction following the "call" for later use by a "ret" (return) +instruction. Rules for the operands are the same as for the "jmp" instruction, +but the "call" has no short variant of direct instruction and thus it not +optimized. + "ret", "retn" and "retf" instructions terminate the execution of a procedure +and transfers control back to the program that originally invoked the +procedure using the address that was stored on the stack by the "call" +instruction. "ret" is the equivalent for "retn", which returns from the +procedure that was executed using the near call, while "retf" returns from +the procedure that was executed using the far call. These instructions default +to the size of address appropriate for the current code setting, but the size +of address can be forced to 16-bit by using the "retw", "retnw" and "retfw" +mnemonics, and to 32-bit by using the "retd", "retnd" and "retfd" mnemonics. +All these instructions may optionally specify an immediate operand, by adding +this constant to the stack pointer, they effectively remove any arguments that +the calling program pushed on the stack before the execution of the "call" +instruction. + "iret" returns control to an interrupted procedure. It differs from "ret" in +that it also pops the flags from the stack into the flags register. The flags +are stored on the stack by the interrupt mechanism. It defaults to the size of +return address appropriate for the current code setting, but it can be forced +to use 16-bit or 32-bit address by using the "iretw" or "iretd" mnemonic. + The conditional transfer instructions are jumps that may or may not transfer +control, depending on the state of the CPU flags when the instruction +executes. The mnemonics for conditional jumps may be obtained by attaching +the condition mnemonic (see table 2.1) to the "j" mnemonic, +for example "jc" instruction will transfer the control when the CF flag is +set. The conditional jumps can be short or near, and direct only, and can be +optimized (see 1.2.5), the operand should be an immediate value specifying +target address. + + Table 2.1 Conditions + /-----------------------------------------------------------\ + | Mnemonic | Condition tested | Description | + |==========|=======================|========================| + | o | OF = 1 | overflow | + |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| + | no | OF = 0 | not overflow | + |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| + | c | | carry | + | b | CF = 1 | below | + | nae | | not above nor equal | + |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| + | nc | | not carry | + | ae | CF = 0 | above or equal | + | nb | | not below | + |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| + | e | ZF = 1 | equal | + | z | | zero | + |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| + | ne | ZF = 0 | not equal | + | nz | | not zero | + |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| + | be | CF or ZF = 1 | below or equal | + | na | | not above | + |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| + | a | CF or ZF = 0 | above | + | nbe | | not below nor equal | + |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| + | s | SF = 1 | sign | + |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| + | ns | SF = 0 | not sign | + |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| + | p | PF = 1 | parity | + | pe | | parity even | + |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| + | np | PF = 0 | not parity | + | po | | parity odd | + |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| + | l | SF xor OF = 1 | less | + | nge | | not greater nor equal | + |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| + | ge | SF xor OF = 0 | greater or equal | + | nl | | not less | + |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| + | le | (SF xor OF) or ZF = 1 | less or equal | + | ng | | not greater | + |----------|-----------------------|------------------------| + | g | (SF xor OF) or ZF = 0 | greater | + | nle | | not less nor equal | + \-----------------------------------------------------------/ + + The "loop" instructions are conditional jumps that use a value placed in +CX (or ECX) to specify the number of repetitions of a software loop. All +"loop" instructions automatically decrement CX (or ECX) and terminate the +loop (don't transfer the control) when CX (or ECX) is zero. It uses CX or ECX +whether the current code setting is 16-bit or 32-bit, but it can be forced to +us CX with the "loopw" mnemonic or to use ECX with the "loopd" mnemonic. +"loope" and "loopz" are the synonyms for the same instruction, which acts as +the standard "loop", but also terminates the loop when ZF flag is set. +"loopew" and "loopzw" mnemonics force them to use CX register while "looped" +and "loopzd" force them to use ECX register. "loopne" and "loopnz" are the +synonyms for the same instructions, which acts as the standard "loop", but +also terminate the loop when ZF flag is not set. "loopnew" and "loopnzw" +mnemonics force them to use CX register while "loopned" and "loopnzd" force +them to use ECX register. Every "loop" instruction needs an operand being an +immediate value specifying target address, it can be only short jump (in the +range of 128 bytes back and 127 bytes forward from the address of instruction +following the "loop" instruction). + "jcxz" branches to the label specified in the instruction if it finds a +value of zero in CX, "jecxz" does the same, but checks the value of ECX +instead of CX. Rules for the operands are the same as for the "loop" +instruction. + "int" activates the interrupt service routine that corresponds to the +number specified as an operand to the instruction, the number should be in +range from 0 to 255. The interrupt service routine terminates with an "iret" +instruction that returns control to the instruction that follows "int". +"int3" mnemonic codes the short (one byte) trap that invokes the interrupt 3. +"into" instruction invokes the interrupt 4 if the OF flag is set. + "bound" verifies that the signed value contained in the specified register +lies within specified limits. An interrupt 5 occurs if the value contained in +the register is less than the lower bound or greater than the upper bound. It +needs two operands, the first operand specifies the register being tested, +the second operand should be memory address for the two signed limit values. +The operands can be "word" or "dword" in size. + + bound ax,[bx] ; check word for bounds + bound eax,[esi] ; check double word for bounds + + +2.1.7 I/O instructions + + "in" transfers a byte, word, or double word from an input port to AL, AX, +or EAX. I/O ports can be addressed either directly, with the immediate byte +value coded in instruction, or indirectly via the DX register. The destination +operand should be AL, AX, or EAX register. The source operand should be an +immediate value in range from 0 to 255, or DX register. + + in al,20h ; input byte from port 20h + in ax,dx ; input word from port addressed by dx + + "out" transfers a byte, word, or double word to an output port from AL, AX, +or EAX. The program can specify the number of the port using the same methods +as the "in" instruction. The destination operand should be an immediate value +in range from 0 to 255, or DX register. The source operand should be AL, AX, +or EAX register. + + out 20h,ax ; output word to port 20h + out dx,al ; output byte to port addressed by dx + + +2.1.8 Strings operations + +The string operations operate on one element of a string. A string element +may be a byte, a word, or a double word. The string elements are addressed by +SI and DI (or ESI and EDI) registers. After every string operation SI and/or +DI (or ESI and/or EDI) are automatically updated to point to the next element +of the string. If DF (direction flag) is zero, the index registers are +incremented, if DF is one, they are decremented. The amount of the increment +or decrement is 1, 2, or 4 depending on the size of the string element. Every +string operation instruction has short forms which have no operands and use +SI and/or DI when the code type is 16-bit, and ESI and/or EDI when the code +type is 32-bit. SI and ESI by default address data in the segment selected +by DS, DI and EDI always address data in the segment selected by ES. Short +form is obtained by attaching to the mnemonic of string operation letter +specifying the size of string element, it should be "b" for byte element, +"w" for word element, and "d" for double word element. Full form of string +operation needs operands providing the size operator and the memory addresses, +which can be SI or ESI with any segment prefix, DI or EDI always with ES +segment prefix. + "movs" transfers the string element pointed to by SI (or ESI) to the +location pointed to by DI (or EDI). Size of operands can be byte, word, or +double word. The destination operand should be memory addressed by DI or EDI, +the source operand should be memory addressed by SI or ESI with any segment +prefix. + + movs byte [di],[si] ; transfer byte + movs word [es:di],[ss:si] ; transfer word + movsd ; transfer double word + + "cmps" subtracts the destination string element from the source string +element and updates the flags AF, SF, PF, CF and OF, but it does not change +any of the compared elements. If the string elements are equal, ZF is set, +otherwise it is cleared. The first operand for this instruction should be the +source string element addressed by SI or ESI with any segment prefix, the +second operand should be the destination string element addressed by DI or +EDI. + + cmpsb ; compare bytes + cmps word [ds:si],[es:di] ; compare words + cmps dword [fs:esi],[edi] ; compare double words + + "scas" subtracts the destination string element from AL, AX, or EAX +(depending on the size of string element) and updates the flags AF, SF, ZF, +PF, CF and OF. If the values are equal, ZF is set, otherwise it is cleared. +The operand should be the destination string element addressed by DI or EDI. + + scas byte [es:di] ; scan byte + scasw ; scan word + scas dword [es:edi] ; scan double word + + "stos" places the value of AL, AX, or EAX into the destination string +element. Rules for the operand are the same as for the "scas" instruction. + "lods" places the source string element into AL, AX, or EAX. The operand +should be the source string element addressed by SI or ESI with any segment +prefix. + + lods byte [ds:si] ; load byte + lods word [cs:si] ; load word + lodsd ; load double word + + "ins" transfers a byte, word, or double word from an input port addressed +by DX register to the destination string element. The destination operand +should be memory addressed by DI or EDI, the source operand should be the DX +register. + + insb ; input byte + ins word [es:di],dx ; input word + ins dword [edi],dx ; input double word + + "outs" transfers the source string element to an output port addressed by +DX register. The destination operand should be the DX register and the source +operand should be memory addressed by SI or ESI with any segment prefix. + + outs dx,byte [si] ; output byte + outsw ; output word + outs dx,dword [gs:esi] ; output double word + + The repeat prefixes "rep", "repe"/"repz", and "repne"/"repnz" specify +repeated string operation. When a string operation instruction has a repeat +prefix, the operation is executed repeatedly, each time using a different +element of the string. The repetition terminates when one of the conditions +specified by the prefix is satisfied. All three prefixes automatically +decrease CX or ECX register (depending whether string operation instruction +uses the 16-bit or 32-bit addressing) after each operation and repeat the +associated operation until CX or ECX is zero. "repe"/"repz" and +"repne"/"repnz" are used exclusively with the "scas" and "cmps" instructions +(described below). When these prefixes are used, repetition of the next +instruction depends on the zero flag (ZF) also, "repe" and "repz" terminate +the execution when the ZF is zero, "repne" and "repnz" terminate the execution +when the ZF is set. + + rep movsd ; transfer multiple double words + repe cmpsb ; compare bytes until not equal + + +2.1.9 Flag control instructions + +The flag control instructions provide a method for directly changing the +state of bits in the flag register. All instructions described in this +section have no operands. + "stc" sets the CF (carry flag) to 1, "clc" zeroes the CF, "cmc" changes the +CF to its complement. "std" sets the DF (direction flag) to 1, "cld" zeroes +the DF, "sti" sets the IF (interrupt flag) to 1 and therefore enables the +interrupts, "cli" zeroes the IF and therefore disables the interrupts. + "lahf" copies SF, ZF, AF, PF, and CF to bits 7, 6, 4, 2, and 0 of the +AH register. The contents of the remaining bits are undefined. The flags +remain unaffected. + "sahf" transfers bits 7, 6, 4, 2, and 0 from the AH register into SF, ZF, +AF, PF, and CF. + "pushf" decrements "esp" by two or four and stores the low word or +double word of flags register at the top of stack, size of stored data +depends on the current code setting. "pushfw" variant forces storing the +word and "pushfd" forces storing the double word. + "popf" transfers specific bits from the word or double word at the top +of stack, then increments "esp" by two or four, this value depends on +the current code setting. "popfw" variant forces restoring from the word +and "popfd" forces restoring from the double word. + + +2.1.10 Conditional operations + + The instructions obtained by attaching the condition mnemonic (see table +2.1) to the "set" mnemonic set a byte to one if the condition is true and set +the byte to zero otherwise. The operand should be an 8-bit be general register +or the byte in memory. + + setne al ; set al if zero flag cleared + seto byte [bx] ; set byte if overflow + + "salc" instruction sets the all bits of AL register when the carry flag is +set and zeroes the AL register otherwise. This instruction has no arguments. + The instructions obtained by attaching the condition mnemonic to "cmov" +mnemonic transfer the word or double word from the general register or memory +to the general register only when the condition is true. The destination +operand should be general register, the source operand can be general register +or memory. + + cmove ax,bx ; move when zero flag set + cmovnc eax,[ebx] ; move when carry flag cleared + + "cmpxchg" compares the value in the AL, AX, or EAX register with the +destination operand. If the two values are equal, the source operand is +loaded into the destination operand. Otherwise, the destination operand is +loaded into the AL, AX, or EAX register. The destination operand may be a +general register or memory, the source operand must be a general register. + + cmpxchg dl,bl ; compare and exchange with register + cmpxchg [bx],dx ; compare and exchange with memory + + "cmpxchg8b" compares the 64-bit value in EDX and EAX registers with the +destination operand. If the values are equal, the 64-bit value in ECX and EBX +registers is stored in the destination operand. Otherwise, the value in the +destination operand is loaded into EDX and EAX registers. The destination +operand should be a quad word in memory. + + cmpxchg8b [bx] ; compare and exchange 8 bytes + + +2.1.11 Miscellaneous instructions + +"nop" instruction occupies one byte but affects nothing but the instruction +pointer. This instruction has no operands and doesn't perform any operation. + "ud2" instruction generates an invalid opcode exception. This instruction +is provided for software testing to explicitly generate an invalid opcode. +This is instruction has no operands. + "xlat" replaces a byte in the AL register with a byte indexed by its value +in a translation table addressed by BX or EBX. The operand should be a byte +memory addressed by BX or EBX with any segment prefix. This instruction has +also a short form "xlatb" which has no operands and uses the BX or EBX address +in the segment selected by DS depending on the current code setting. + "lds" transfers a pointer variable from the source operand to DS and the +destination register. The source operand must be a memory operand, and the +destination operand must be a general register. The DS register receives the +segment selector of the pointer while the destination register receives the +offset part of the pointer. "les", "lfs", "lgs" and "lss" operate identically +to "lds" except that rather than DS register the ES, FS, GS and SS is used +respectively. + + lds bx,[si] ; load pointer to ds:bx + + "lea" transfers the offset of the source operand (rather than its value) +to the destination operand. The source operand must be a memory operand, and +the destination operand must be a general register. + + lea dx,[bx+si+1] ; load effective address to dx + + "cpuid" returns processor identification and feature information in the +EAX, EBX, ECX, and EDX registers. The information returned is selected by +entering a value in the EAX register before the instruction is executed. +This instruction has no operands. + "pause" instruction delays the execution of the next instruction an +implementation specific amount of time. It can be used to improve the +performance of spin wait loops. This instruction has no operands. + "enter" creates a stack frame that may be used to implement the scope rules +of block-structured high-level languages. A "leave" instruction at the end of +a procedure complements an "enter" at the beginning of the procedure to +simplify stack management and to control access to variables for nested +procedures. The "enter" instruction includes two parameters. The first +parameter specifies the number of bytes of dynamic storage to be allocated on +the stack for the routine being entered. The second parameter corresponds to +the lexical nesting level of the routine, it can be in range from 0 to 31. +The specified lexical level determines how many sets of stack frame pointers +the CPU copies into the new stack frame from the preceding frame. This list +of stack frame pointers is sometimes called the display. The first word (or +double word when code is 32-bit) of the display is a pointer to the last stack +frame. This pointer enables a "leave" instruction to reverse the action of the +previous "enter" instruction by effectively discarding the last stack frame. +After "enter" creates the new display for a procedure, it allocates the +dynamic storage space for that procedure by decrementing ESP by the number of +bytes specified in the first parameter. To enable a procedure to address its +display, "enter" leaves BP (or EBP) pointing to the beginning of the new stack +frame. If the lexical level is zero, "enter" pushes BP (or EBP), copies SP to +BP (or ESP to EBP) and then subtracts the first operand from ESP. For nesting +levels greater than zero, the processor pushes additional frame pointers on +the stack before adjusting the stack pointer. + + enter 2048,0 ; enter and allocate 2048 bytes on stack + + +2.1.12 System instructions + +"lmsw" loads the operand into the machine status word (bits 0 through 15 of +CR0 register), while "smsw" stores the machine status word into the +destination operand. The operand for both those instructions can be 16-bit +general register or memory, for "smsw" it can also be 32-bit general +register. + + lmsw ax ; load machine status from register + smsw [bx] ; store machine status to memory + + "lgdt" and "lidt" instructions load the values in operand into the global +descriptor table register or the interrupt descriptor table register +respectively. "sgdt" and "sidt" store the contents of the global descriptor +table register or the interrupt descriptor table register in the destination +operand. The operand should be a 6 bytes in memory. + + lgdt [ebx] ; load global descriptor table + + "lldt" loads the operand into the segment selector field of the local +descriptor table register and "sldt" stores the segment selector from the +local descriptor table register in the operand. "ltr" loads the operand into +the segment selector field of the task register and "str" stores the segment +selector from the task register in the operand. Rules for operand are the same +as for the "lmsw" and "smsw" instructions. + "lar" loads the access rights from the segment descriptor specified by +the selector in source operand into the destination operand and sets the ZF +flag. The destination operand can be a 16-bit or 32-bit general register. +The source operand should be a 16-bit general register or memory. + + lar ax,[bx] ; load access rights into word + lar eax,dx ; load access rights into double word + + "lsl" loads the segment limit from the segment descriptor specified by the +selector in source operand into the destination operand and sets the ZF flag. +Rules for operand are the same as for the "lar" instruction. + "verr" and "verw" verify whether the code or data segment specified with +the operand is readable or writable from the current privilege level. The +operand should be a word, it can be general register or memory. If the segment +is accessible and readable (for "verr") or writable (for "verw") the ZF flag +is set, otherwise it's cleared. Rules for operand are the same as for the +"lldt" instruction. + "arpl" compares the RPL (requestor's privilege level) fields of two segment +selectors. The first operand contains one segment selector and the second +operand contains the other. If the RPL field of the destination operand is +less than the RPL field of the source operand, the ZF flag is set and the RPL +field of the destination operand is increased to match that of the source +operand. Otherwise, the ZF flag is cleared and no change is made to the +destination operand. The destination operand can be a word general register +or memory, the source operand must be a general register. + + arpl bx,ax ; adjust RPL of selector in register + arpl [bx],ax ; adjust RPL of selector in memory + + "clts" clears the TS (task switched) flag in the CR0 register. This +instruction has no operands. + "lock" prefix causes the processor's bus-lock signal to be asserted during +execution of the accompanying instruction. In a multiprocessor environment, +the bus-lock signal insures that the processor has exclusive use of any shared +memory while the signal is asserted. The "lock" prefix can be prepended only +to the following instructions and only to those forms of the instructions +where the destination operand is a memory operand: "add", "adc", "and", "btc", +"btr", "bts", "cmpxchg", "cmpxchg8b", "dec", "inc", "neg", "not", "or", "sbb", +"sub", "xor", "xadd" and "xchg". If the "lock" prefix is used with one of +these instructions and the source operand is a memory operand, an undefined +opcode exception may be generated. An undefined opcode exception will also be +generated if the "lock" prefix is used with any instruction not in the above +list. The "xchg" instruction always asserts the bus-lock signal regardless of +the presence or absence of the "lock" prefix. + "hlt" stops instruction execution and places the processor in a halted +state. An enabled interrupt, a debug exception, the BINIT, INIT or the RESET +signal will resume execution. This instruction has no operands. + "invlpg" invalidates (flushes) the TLB (translation lookaside buffer) entry +specified with the operand, which should be a memory. The processor determines +the page that contains that address and flushes the TLB entry for that page. + "rdmsr" loads the contents of a 64-bit MSR (model specific register) of the +address specified in the ECX register into registers EDX and EAX. "wrmsr" +writes the contents of registers EDX and EAX into the 64-bit MSR of the +address specified in the ECX register. "rdtsc" loads the current value of the +processor's time stamp counter from the 64-bit MSR into the EDX and EAX +registers. The processor increments the time stamp counter MSR every clock +cycle and resets it to 0 whenever the processor is reset. "rdpmc" loads the +contents of the 40-bit performance monitoring counter specified in the ECX +register into registers EDX and EAX. These instructions have no operands. + "wbinvd" writes back all modified cache lines in the processor's internal +cache to main memory and invalidates (flushes) the internal caches. The +instruction then issues a special function bus cycle that directs external +caches to also write back modified data and another bus cycle to indicate that +the external caches should be invalidated. This instruction has no operands. + "rsm" return program control from the system management mode to the program +that was interrupted when the processor received an SMM interrupt. This +instruction has no operands. + "sysenter" executes a fast call to a level 0 system procedure, "sysexit" +executes a fast return to level 3 user code. The addresses used by these +instructions are stored in MSRs. These instructions have no operands. + + +2.1.13 FPU instructions + +The FPU (Floating-Point Unit) instructions operate on the floating-point +values in three formats: single precision (32-bit), double precision (64-bit) +and double extended precision (80-bit). The FPU registers form the stack and +each of them holds the double extended precision floating-point value. When +some values are pushed onto the stack or are removed from the top, the FPU +registers are shifted, so ST0 is always the value on the top of FPU stack, ST1 +is the first value below the top, etc. The ST0 name has also the synonym ST. + "fld" pushes the floating-point value onto the FPU register stack. The +operand can be 32-bit, 64-bit or 80-bit memory location or the FPU register, +its value is then loaded onto the top of FPU register stack (the ST0 +register) and is automatically converted into the double extended precision +format. + + fld dword [bx] ; load single prevision value from memory + fld st2 ; push value of st2 onto register stack + + "fld1", "fldz", "fldl2t", "fldl2e", "fldpi", "fldlg2" and "fldln2" load the +commonly used contants onto the FPU register stack. The loaded constants are ++1.0, +0.0, lb 10, lb e, pi, lg 2 and ln 2 respectively. These instructions +have no operands. + "fild" converts the signed integer source operand into double extended +precision floating-point format and pushes the result onto the FPU register +stack. The source operand can be a 16-bit, 32-bit or 64-bit memory location. + + fild qword [bx] ; load 64-bit integer from memory + + "fst" copies the value of ST0 register to the destination operand, which +can be 32-bit or 64-bit memory location or another FPU register. "fstp" +performs the same operation as "fst" and then pops the register stack, +getting rid of ST0. "fstp" accepts the same operands as the "fst" instruction +and can also store value in the 80-bit memory. + + fst st3 ; copy value of st0 into st3 register + fstp tword [bx] ; store value in memory and pop stack + + "fist" converts the value in ST0 to a signed integer and stores the result +in the destination operand. The operand can be 16-bit or 32-bit memory +location. "fistp" performs the same operation and then pops the register +stack, it accepts the same operands as the "fist" instruction and can also +store integer value in the 64-bit memory, so it has the same rules for +operands as "fild" instruction. + "fbld" converts the packed BCD integer into double extended precision +floating-point format and pushes this value onto the FPU stack. "fbstp" +converts the value in ST0 to an 18-digit packed BCD integer, stores the result +in the destination operand, and pops the register stack. The operand should be +an 80-bit memory location. + "fadd" adds the destination and source operand and stores the sum in the +destination location. The destination operand is always an FPU register, if +the source is a memory location, the destination is ST0 register and only +source operand should be specified. If both operands are FPU registers, at +least one of them should be ST0 register. An operand in memory can be a +32-bit or 64-bit value. + + fadd qword [bx] ; add double precision value to st0 + fadd st2,st0 ; add st0 to st2 + + "faddp" adds the destination and source operand, stores the sum in the +destination location and then pops the register stack. The destination operand +must be an FPU register and the source operand must be the ST0. When no +operands are specified, ST1 is used as a destination operand. + + faddp ; add st0 to st1 and pop the stack + faddp st2,st0 ; add st0 to st2 and pop the stack + +"fiadd" instruction converts an integer source operand into double extended +precision floating-point value and adds it to the destination operand. The +operand should be a 16-bit or 32-bit memory location. + + fiadd word [bx] ; add word integer to st0 + + "fsub", "fsubr", "fmul", "fdiv", "fdivr" instruction are similar to "fadd", +have the same rules for operands and differ only in the perfomed computation. +"fsub" substracts the source operand from the destination operand, "fsubr" +substract the destination operand from the source operand, "fmul" multiplies +the destination and source operands, "fdiv" divides the destination operand by +the source operand and "fdivr" divides the source operand by the destination +operand. "fsubp", "fsubrp", "fmulp", "fdivp", "fdivrp" perform the same +operations and pop the register stack, the rules for operand are the same as +for the "faddp" instruction. "fisub", "fisubr", "fimul", "fidiv", "fidivr" +perform these operations after converting the integer source operand into +floating-point value, they have the same rules for operands as "fiadd" +instruction. + "fsqrt" computes the square root of the value in ST0 register, "fsin" +computes the sine of that value, "fcos" computes the cosine of that value, +"fchs" complements its sign bit, "fabs" clears its sign to create the absolute +value, "frndint" rounds it to the nearest integral value, depending on the +current rounding mode. "f2xm1" computes the exponential value of 2 to the +power of ST0 and substracts the 1.0 from it, the value of ST0 must lie in the +range -1.0 to +1.0. All these instruction store the result in ST0 and have no +operands. + "fsincos" computes both the sine and the cosine of the value in ST0 +register, stores the sine in ST0 and pushes the cosine on the top of FPU +register stack. "fptan" computes the tangent of the value in ST0, stores the +result in ST0 and pushes a 1.0 onto the FPU register stack. "fpatan" computes +the arctangent of the value in ST1 divided by the value in ST0, stores the +result in ST1 and pops the FPU register stack. "fyl2x" computes the binary +logarithm of ST0, multiplies it by ST1, stores the result in ST1 and pops the +FPU register stack; "fyl2xp1" performs the same operation but it adds 1.0 to +ST0 before computing the logarithm. "fprem" computes the remainder obtained +from dividing the value in ST0 by the value in ST1, and stores the result +in ST0. "fprem1" performs the same operation as "fprem", but it computes the +remainder in the way specified by IEEE Standard 754. "fscale" truncates the +value in ST1 and increases the exponent of ST0 by this value. "fxtract" +separates the value in ST0 into its exponent and significand, stores the +exponent in ST0 and pushes the significand onto the register stack. "fnop" +performs no operation. These instruction have no operands. + "fxch" exchanges the contents of ST0 an another FPU register. The operand +should be an FPU register, if no operand is specified, the contents of ST0 and +ST1 are exchanged. + "fcom" and "fcomp" compare the contents of ST0 and the source operand and +set flags in the FPU status word according to the results. "fcomp" +additionally pops the register stack after performing the comparison. The +operand can be a single or double precision value in memory or the FPU +register. When no operand is specified, ST1 is used as a source operand. + + fcom ; compare st0 with st1 + fcomp st2 ; compare st0 with st2 and pop stack + + "fcompp" compares the contents of ST0 and ST1, sets flags in the FPU status +word according to the results and pops the register stack twice. This +instruction has no operands. + "fucom", "fucomp" and "fucompp" performs an unordered comparison of two FPU +registers. Rules for operands are the same as for the "fcom", "fcomp" and +"fcompp", but the source operand must be an FPU register. + "ficom" and "ficomp" compare the value in ST0 with an integer source operand +and set the flags in the FPU status word according to the results. "ficomp" +additionally pops the register stack after performing the comparison. The +integer value is converted to double extended precision floating-point format +before the comparison is made. The operand should be a 16-bit or 32-bit +memory location. + + ficom word [bx] ; compare st0 with 16-bit integer + + "fcomi", "fcomip", "fucomi", "fucomip" perform the comparison of ST0 with +another FPU register and set the ZF, PF and CF flags according to the results. +"fcomip" and "fucomip" additionaly pop the register stack after performing the +comparison. The instructions obtained by attaching the FPU condition mnemonic +(see table 2.2) to the "fcmov" mnemonic transfer the specified FPU register +into ST0 register if the fiven test condition is true. These instruction +allow two different syntaxes, one with single operand specifying the source +FPU register, and one with two operands, in that case destination operand +should be ST0 register and the second operand specifies the source FPU +register. + + fcomi st2 ; compare st0 with st2 and set flags + fcmovb st0,st2 ; transfer st2 to st0 if below + + Table 2.2 FPU conditions + /------------------------------------------------------\ + | Mnemonic | Condition tested | Description | + |==========|==================|========================| + | b | CF = 1 | below | + | e | ZF = 1 | equal | + | be | CF or ZF = 1 | below or equal | + | u | PF = 1 | unordered | + | nb | CF = 0 | not below | + | ne | ZF = 0 | not equal | + | nbe | CF and ZF = 0 | not below nor equal | + | nu | PF = 0 | not unordered | + \------------------------------------------------------/ + + "ftst" compares the value in ST0 with 0.0 and sets the flags in the FPU +status word according to the results. "fxam" examines the contents of the ST0 +and sets the flags in FPU status word to indicate the class of value in the +register. These instructions have no operands. + "fstsw" and "fnstsw" store the current value of the FPU status word in the +destination location. The destination operand can be either a 16-bit memory or +the AX register. "fstsw" checks for pending umasked FPU exceptions before +storing the status word, "fnstsw" does not. + "fstcw" and "fnstcw" store the current value of the FPU control word at the +specified destination in memory. "fstcw" checks for pending umasked FPU +exceptions before storing the control word, "fnstcw" does not. "fldcw" loads +the operand into the FPU control word. The operand should be a 16-bit memory +location. + "fstenv" and "fnstenv" store the current FPU operating environment at the +memory location specified with the destination operand, and then mask all FPU +exceptions. "fstenv" checks for pending umasked FPU exceptions before +proceeding, "fnstenv" does not. "fldenv" loads the complete operating +environment from memory into the FPU. "fsave" and "fnsave" store the current +FPU state (operating environment and register stack) at the specified +destination in memory and reinitializes the FPU. "fsave" check for pending +unmasked FPU exceptions before proceeding, "fnsave" does not. "frstor" +loads the FPU state from the specified memory location. All these instructions +need an operand being a memory location. For each of these instruction +exist two additional mnemonics that allow to precisely select the type of the +operation. The "fstenvw", "fnstenvw", "fldenvw", "fsavew", "fnsavew" and +"frstorw" mnemonics force the instruction to perform operation as in the 16-bit +mode, while "fstenvd", "fnstenvd", "fldenvd", "fsaved", "fnsaved" and "frstord" +force the operation as in 32-bit mode. + "finit" and "fninit" set the FPU operating environment into its default +state. "finit" checks for pending unmasked FPU exception before proceeding, +"fninit" does not. "fclex" and "fnclex" clear the FPU exception flags in the +FPU status word. "fclex" checks for pending unmasked FPU exception before +proceeding, "fnclex" does not. "wait" and "fwait" are synonyms for the same +instruction, which causes the processor to check for pending unmasked FPU +exceptions and handle them before proceeding. These instruction have no +operands. + "ffree" sets the tag associated with specified FPU register to empty. The +operand should be an FPU register. + "fincstp" and "fdecstp" rotate the FPU stack by one by adding or +substracting one to the pointer of the top of stack. These instruction have no +operands. + + +2.1.14 MMX instructions + +The MMX instructions operate on the packed integer types and use the MMX +registers, which are the low 64-bit parts of the 80-bit FPU registers. Because +of this MMX instructions cannot be used at the same time as FPU instructions. +They can operate on packed bytes (eight 8-bit integers), packed words (four +16-bit integers) or packed double words (two 32-bit integers), use of packed +formats allows to perform operations on multiple data at one time. + "movq" copies a quad word from the source operand to the destination +operand. At least one of the operands must be a MMX register, the second one +can be also a MMX register or 64-bit memory location. + + movq mm0,mm1 ; move quad word from register to register + movq mm2,[ebx] ; move quad word from memory to register + + "movd" copies a double word from the source operand to the destination +operand. One of the operands must be a MMX register, the second one can be a +general register or 32-bit memory location. Only low double word of MMX +register is used. + All general MMX operations have two operands, the destination operand should +be a MMX register, the source operand can be a MMX register or 64-bit memory +location. Operation is performed on the corresponding data elements of the +source and destination operand and stored in the data elements of the +destination operand. "paddb", "paddw" and "paddd" perform the addition of +packed bytes, packed words, or packed double words. "psubb", "psubw" and +"psubd" perform the substraction of appropriate types. "paddsb", "paddsw", +"psubsb" and "psubsw" perform the addition or substraction of packed bytes +or packed words with the signed saturation. "paddusb", "paddusw", "psubusb", +"psubusw" are analoguous, but with unsigned saturation. "pmulhw" and "pmullw" +performs a signed multiplication of the packed words and store the high or low +words of the results in the destination operand. "pmaddwd" performs a multiply +of the packed words and adds the four intermediate double word products in +pairs to produce result as a packed double words. "pand", "por" and "pxor" +perform the logical operations on the quad words, "pandn" peforms also a +logical negation of the destination operand before performing the "and" +operation. "pcmpeqb", "pcmpeqw" and "pcmpeqd" compare for equality of packed +bytes, packed words or packed double words. If a pair of data elements is +equal, the corresponding data element in the destination operand is filled with +bits of value 1, otherwise it's set to 0. "pcmpgtb", "pcmpgtw" and "pcmpgtd" +perform the similar operation, but they check whether the data elements in the +destination operand are greater than the correspoding data elements in the +source operand. "packsswb" converts packed signed words into packed signed +bytes, "packssdw" converts packed signed double words into packed signed +words, using saturation to handle overflow conditions. "packuswb" converts +packed signed words into packed unsigned bytes. Converted data elements from +the source operand are stored in the low part of the destination operand, +while converted data elements from the destination operand are stored in the +high part. "punpckhbw", "punpckhwd" and "punpckhdq" interleaves the data +elements from the high parts of the source and destination operands and +stores the result into the destination operand. "punpcklbw", "punpcklwd" and +"punpckldq" perform the same operation, but the low parts of the source and +destination operand are used. + + paddsb mm0,[esi] ; add packed bytes with signed saturation + pcmpeqw mm3,mm7 ; compare packed words for equality + + "psllw", "pslld" and "psllq" perform logical shift left of the packed words, +packed double words or a single quad word in the destination operand by the +amount specified in the source operand. "psrlw", "psrld" and "psrlq" perform +logical shift right of the packed words, packed double words or a single quad +word. "psraw" and "psrad" perform arithmetic shift of the packed words or +double words. The destination operand should be a MMX register, while source +operand can be a MMX register, 64-bit memory location, or 8-bit immediate +value. + + psllw mm2,mm4 ; shift words left logically + psrad mm4,[ebx] ; shift double words right arithmetically + + "emms" makes the FPU registers usable for the FPU instructions, it must be +used before using the FPU instructions if any MMX instructions were used. + + +2.1.15 SSE instructions + +The SSE extension adds more MMX instructions and also introduces the +operations on packed single precision floating point values. The 128-bit +packed single precision format consists of four single precision floating +point values. The 128-bit SSE registers are designed for the purpose of +operations on this data type. + "movaps" and "movups" transfer a double quad word operand containing packed +single precision values from source operand to destination operand. At least +one of the operands have to be a SSE register, the second one can be also a +SSE register or 128-bit memory location. Memory operands for "movaps" +instruction must be aligned on boundary of 16 bytes, operands for "movups" +instruction don't have to be aligned. + + movups xmm0,[ebx] ; move unaligned double quad word + + "movlps" moves packed two single precision values between the memory and the +low quad word of SSE register. "movhps" moved packed two single precision +values between the memory and the high quad word of SSE register. One of the +operands must be a SSE register, and the other operand must be a 64-bit memory +location. + + movlps xmm0,[ebx] ; move memory to low quad word of xmm0 + movhps [esi],xmm7 ; move high quad word of xmm7 to memory + + "movlhps" moves packed two single precision values from the low quad word +of source register to the high quad word of destination register. "movhlps" +moves two packed single precision values from the high quad word of source +register to the low quad word of destination register. Both operands have to +be a SSE registers. + "movmskps" transfers the most significant bit of each of the four single +precision values in the SSE register into low four bits of a general register. +The source operand must be a SSE register, the destination operand must be a +general register. + "movss" transfers a single precision value between source and destination +operand (only the low double word is trasferred). At least one of the operands +have to be a SSE register, the second one can be also a SSE register or 32-bit +memory location. + + movss [edi],xmm3 ; move low double word of xmm3 to memory + + Each of the SSE arithmetic operations has two variants. When the mnemonic +ends with "ps", the source operand can be a 128-bit memory location or a SSE +register, the destination operand must be a SSE register and the operation is +performed on packed four single precision values, for each pair of the +corresponding data elements separately, the result is stored in the +destination register. When the mnemonic ends with "ss", the source operand +can be a 32-bit memory location or a SSE register, the destination operand +must be a SSE register and the operation is performed on single precision +values, only low double words of SSE registers are used in this case, the +result is stored in the low double word of destination register. "addps" and +"addss" add the values, "subps" and "subss" substract the source value from +destination value, "mulps" and "mulss" multiply the values, "divps" and +"divss" divide the destination value by the source value, "rcpps" and "rcpss" +compute the approximate reciprocal of the source value, "sqrtps" and "sqrtss" +compute the square root of the source value, "rsqrtps" and "rsqrtss" compute +the approximate reciprocal of square root of the source value, "maxps" and +"maxss" compare the source and destination values and return the greater one, +"minps" and "minss" compare the source and destination values and return the +lesser one. + + mulss xmm0,[ebx] ; multiply single precision values + addps xmm3,xmm7 ; add packed single precision values + + "andps", "andnps", "orps" and "xorps" perform the logical operations on +packed single precision values. The source operand can be a 128-bit memory +location or a SSE register, the destination operand must be a SSE register. + "cmpps" compares packed single precision values and returns a mask result +into the destination operand, which must be a SSE register. The source operand +can be a 128-bit memory location or SSE register, the third operand must be an +immediate operand selecting code of one of the eight compare conditions +(table 2.3). "cmpss" performs the same operation on single precision values, +only low double word of destination register is affected, in this case source +operand can be a 32-bit memory location or SSE register. These two +instructions have also variants with only two operands and the condition +encoded within mnemonic. Their mnemonics are obtained by attaching the +mnemonic from table 2.3 to the "cmp" mnemonic and then attaching the "ps" or +"ss" at the end. + + cmpps xmm2,xmm4,0 ; compare packed single precision values + cmpltss xmm0,[ebx] ; compare single precision values + + Table 2.3 SSE conditions + /-------------------------------------------\ + | Code | Mnemonic | Description | + |======|==========|=========================| + | 0 | eq | equal | + | 1 | lt | less than | + | 2 | le | less than or equal | + | 3 | unord | unordered | + | 4 | neq | not equal | + | 5 | nlt | not less than | + | 6 | nle | not less than nor equal | + | 7 | ord | ordered | + \-------------------------------------------/ + + "comiss" and "ucomiss" compare the single precision values and set the ZF, +PF and CF flags to show the result. The destination operand must be a SSE +register, the source operand can be a 32-bit memory location or SSE register. + "shufps" moves any two of the four single precision values from the +destination operand into the low quad word of the destination operand, and any +two of the four values from the source operand into the high quad word of the +destination operand. The destination operand must be a SSE register, the +source operand can be a 128-bit memory location or SSE register, the third +operand must be an 8-bit immediate value selecting which values will be moved +into the destination operand. Bits 0 and 1 select the value to be moved from +destination operand to the low double word of the result, bits 2 and 3 select +the value to be moved from the destination operand to the second double word, +bits 4 and 5 select the value to be moved from the source operand to the third +double word, and bits 6 and 7 select the value to be moved from the source +operand to the high double word of the result. + + shufps xmm0,xmm0,10010011b ; shuffle double words + + "unpckhps" performs an interleaved unpack of the values from the high parts +of the source and destination operands and stores the result in the +destination operand, which must be a SSE register. The source operand can be +a 128-bit memory location or a SSE register. "unpcklps" performs an +interleaved unpack of the values from the low parts of the source and +destination operand and stores the result in the destination operand, +the rules for operands are the same. + "cvtpi2ps" converts packed two double word integers into the the packed two +single precision floating point values and stores the result in the low quad +word of the destination operand, which should be a SSE register. The source +operand can be a 64-bit memory location or MMX register. + + cvtpi2ps xmm0,mm0 ; convert integers to single precision values + + "cvtsi2ss" converts a double word integer into a single precision floating +point value and stores the result in the low double word of the destination +operand, which should be a SSE register. The source operand can be a 32-bit +memory location or 32-bit general register. + + cvtsi2ss xmm0,eax ; convert integer to single precision value + + "cvtps2pi" converts packed two single precision floating point values into +packed two double word integers and stores the result in the destination +operand, which should be a MMX register. The source operand can be a 64-bit +memory location or SSE register, only low quad word of SSE register is used. +"cvttps2pi" performs the similar operation, except that truncation is used to +round a source values to integers, rules for the operands are the same. + + cvtps2pi mm0,xmm0 ; convert single precision values to integers + + "cvtss2si" convert a single precision floating point value into a double +word integer and stores the result in the destination operand, which should be +a 32-bit general register. The source operand can be a 32-bit memory location +or SSE register, only low double word of SSE register is used. "cvttss2si" +performs the similar operation, except that truncation is used to round a +source value to integer, rules for the operands are the same. + + cvtss2si eax,xmm0 ; convert single precision value to integer + + "pextrw" copies the word in the source operand specified by the third +operand to the destination operand. The source operand must be a MMX register, +the destination operand must be a 32-bit general register (the high word of +the destination is cleared), the third operand must an 8-bit immediate value. + + pextrw eax,mm0,1 ; extract word into eax + + "pinsrw" inserts a word from the source operand in the destination operand +at the location specified with the third operand, which must be an 8-bit +immediate value. The destination operand must be a MMX register, the source +operand can be a 16-bit memory location or 32-bit general register (only low +word of the register is used). + + pinsrw mm1,ebx,2 ; insert word from ebx + + "pavgb" and "pavgw" compute average of packed bytes or words. "pmaxub" +return the maximum values of packed unsigned bytes, "pminub" returns the +minimum values of packed unsigned bytes, "pmaxsw" returns the maximum values +of packed signed words, "pminsw" returns the minimum values of packed signed +words. "pmulhuw" performs a unsigned multiplication of the packed words and +stores the high words of the results in the destination operand. "psadbw" +computes the absolute differences of packed unsigned bytes, sums the +differences, and stores the sum in the low word of destination operand. All +these instructions follow the same rules for operands as the general MMX +operations described in previous section. + "pmovmskb" creates a mask made of the most significant bit of each byte in +the source operand and stores the result in the low byte of destination +operand. The source operand must be a MMX register, the destination operand +must a 32-bit general register. + "pshufw" inserts words from the source operand in the destination operand +from the locations specified with the third operand. The destination operand +must be a MMX register, the source operand can be a 64-bit memory location or +MMX register, third operand must an 8-bit immediate value selecting which +values will be moved into destination operand, in the similar way as the third +operand of the "shufps" instruction. + "movntq" moves the quad word from the source operand to memory using a +non-temporal hint to minimize cache pollution. The source operand should be a +MMX register, the destination operand should be a 64-bit memory location. +"movntps" stores packed single precision values from the SSE register to +memory using a non-temporal hint. The source operand should be a SSE register, +the destination operand should be a 128-bit memory location. "maskmovq" stores +selected bytes from the first operand into a 64-bit memory location using a +non-temporal hint. Both operands should be a MMX registers, the second operand +selects wich bytes from the source operand are written to memory. The +memory location is pointed by DI (or EDI) register in the segment selected +by DS. + "prefetcht0", "prefetcht1", "prefetcht2" and "prefetchnta" fetch the line +of data from memory that contains byte specified with the operand to a +specified location in hierarchy. The operand should be an 8-bit memory +location. + "sfence" performs a serializing operation on all instruction storing to +memory that were issued prior to it. This instruction has no operands. + "ldmxcsr" loads the 32-bit memory operand into the MXCSR register. "stmxcsr" +stores the contents of MXCSR into a 32-bit memory operand. + "fxsave" saves the current state of the FPU, MXCSR register, and all the FPU +and SSE registers to a 512-byte memory location specified in the destination +operand. "fxrstor" reloads data previously stored with "fxsave" instruction +from the specified 512-byte memory location. The memory operand for both those +instructions must be aligned on 16 byte boundary, it should declare operand +of no specified size. + + +2.1.16 SSE2 instructions + +The SSE2 extension introduces the operations on packed double precision +floating point values, extends the syntax of MMX instructions, and adds also +some new instructions. + "movapd" and "movupd" transfer a double quad word operand containing packed +double precision values from source operand to destination operand. These +instructions are analogous to "movaps" and "movups" and have the same rules +for operands. + "movlpd" moves double precision value between the memory and the low quad +word of SSE register. "movhpd" moved double precision value between the memory +and the high quad word of SSE register. These instructions are analogous to +"movlps" and "movhps" and have the same rules for operands. + "movmskpd" transfers the most significant bit of each of the two double +precision values in the SSE register into low two bits of a general register. +This instruction is analogous to "movmskps" and has the same rules for +operands. + "movsd" transfers a double precision value between source and destination +operand (only the low quad word is trasferred). At least one of the operands +have to be a SSE register, the second one can be also a SSE register or 64-bit +memory location. + Arithmetic operations on double precision values are: "addpd", "addsd", +"subpd", "subsd", "mulpd", "mulsd", "divpd", "divsd", "sqrtpd", "sqrtsd", +"maxpd", "maxsd", "minpd", "minsd", and they are analoguous to arithmetic +operations on single precision values described in previous section. When the +mnemonic ends with "pd" instead of "ps", the operation is performed on packed +two double precision values, but rules for operands are the same. When the +mnemonic ends with "sd" instead of "ss", the source operand can be a 64-bit +memory location or a SSE register, the destination operand must be a SSE +register and the operation is performed on double precision values, only low +quad words of SSE registers are used in this case. + "andpd", "andnpd", "orpd" and "xorpd" perform the logical operations on +packed double precision values. They are analoguous to SSE logical operations +on single prevision values and have the same rules for operands. + "cmppd" compares packed double precision values and returns and returns a +mask result into the destination operand. This instruction is analoguous to +"cmpps" and has the same rules for operands. "cmpsd" performs the same +operation on double precision values, only low quad word of destination +register is affected, in this case source operand can be a 64-bit memory or +SSE register. Variant with only two operands are obtained by attaching the +condition mnemonic from table 2.3 to the "cmp" mnemonic and then attaching +the "pd" or "sd" at the end. + "comisd" and "ucomisd" compare the double precision values and set the ZF, +PF and CF flags to show the result. The destination operand must be a SSE +register, the source operand can be a 128-bit memory location or SSE register. + "shufpd" moves any of the two double precision values from the destination +operand into the low quad word of the destination operand, and any of the two +values from the source operand into the high quad word of the destination +operand. This instruction is analoguous to "shufps" and has the same rules for +operand. Bit 0 of the third operand selects the value to be moved from the +destination operand, bit 1 selects the value to be moved from the source +operand, the rest of bits are reserved and must be zeroed. + "unpckhpd" performs an unpack of the high quad words from the source and +destination operands, "unpcklpd" performs an unpack of the low quad words from +the source and destination operands. They are analoguous to "unpckhps" and +"unpcklps", and have the same rules for operands. + "cvtps2pd" converts the packed two single precision floating point values to +two packed double precision floating point values, the destination operand +must be a SSE register, the source operand can be a 64-bit memory location or +SSE register. "cvtpd2ps" converts the packed two double precision floating +point values to packed two single precision floating point values, the +destination operand must be a SSE register, the source operand can be a +128-bit memory location or SSE register. "cvtss2sd" converts the single +precision floating point value to double precision floating point value, the +destination operand must be a SSE register, the source operand can be a 32-bit +memory location or SSE register. "cvtsd2ss" converts the double precision +floating point value to single precision floating point value, the destination +operand must be a SSE register, the source operand can be 64-bit memory +location or SSE register. + "cvtpi2pd" converts packed two double word integers into the the packed +double precision floating point values, the destination operand must be a SSE +register, the source operand can be a 64-bit memory location or MMX register. +"cvtsi2sd" converts a double word integer into a double precision floating +point value, the destination operand must be a SSE register, the source +operand can be a 32-bit memory location or 32-bit general register. "cvtpd2pi" +converts packed double precision floating point values into packed two double +word integers, the destination operand should be a MMX register, the source +operand can be a 128-bit memory location or SSE register. "cvttpd2pi" performs +the similar operation, except that truncation is used to round a source values +to integers, rules for operands are the same. "cvtsd2si" converts a double +precision floating point value into a double word integer, the destination +operand should be a 32-bit general register, the source operand can be a +64-bit memory location or SSE register. "cvttsd2si" performs the similar +operation, except that truncation is used to round a source value to integer, +rules for operands are the same. + "cvtps2dq" and "cvttps2dq" convert packed single precision floating point +values to packed four double word integers, storing them in the destination +operand. "cvtpd2dq" and "cvttpd2dq" convert packed double precision floating +point values to packed two double word integers, storing the result in the low +quad word of the destination operand. "cvtdq2ps" converts packed four +double word integers to packed single precision floating point values. +For all these instruction destination operand must be a SSE register, the +source operand can be a 128-bit memory location or SSE register. +"cvtdq2pd" converts packed two double word integers from the source operand to +packed double precision floating point values, the source can be a 64-bit +memory location or SSE register, destination has to be SSE register. + "movdqa" and "movdqu" transfer a double quad word operand containing packed +integers from source operand to destination operand. At least one of the +operands have to be a SSE register, the second one can be also a SSE register +or 128-bit memory location. Memory operands for "movdqa" instruction must be +aligned on boundary of 16 bytes, operands for "movdqu" instruction don't have +to be aligned. + "movq2dq" moves the contents of the MMX source register to the low quad word +of destination SSE register. "movdq2q" moves the low quad word from the source +SSE register to the destination MMX register. + + movq2dq xmm0,mm1 ; move from MMX register to SSE register + movdq2q mm0,xmm1 ; move from SSE register to MMX register + + All MMX instructions operating on the 64-bit packed integers (those with +mnemonics starting with "p") are extended to operate on 128-bit packed +integers located in SSE registers. Additional syntax for these instructions +needs an SSE register where MMX register was needed, and the 128-bit memory +location or SSE register where 64-bit memory location or MMX register were +needed. The exception is "pshufw" instruction, which doesn't allow extended +syntax, but has two new variants: "pshufhw" and "pshuflw", which allow only +the extended syntax, and perform the same operation as "pshufw" on the high +or low quad words of operands respectively. Also the new instruction "pshufd" +is introduced, which performs the same operation as "pshufw", but on the +double words instead of words, it allows only the extended syntax. + + psubb xmm0,[esi] ; substract 16 packed bytes + pextrw eax,xmm0,7 ; extract highest word into eax + + "paddq" performs the addition of packed quad words, "psubq" performs the +substraction of packed quad words, "pmuludq" performs an unsigned +multiplication of low double words from each corresponding quad words and +returns the results in packed quad words. These instructions follow the same +rules for operands as the general MMX operations described in 2.1.14. + "pslldq" and "psrldq" perform logical shift left or right of the double +quad word in the destination operand by the amount of bytes specified in the +source operand. The destination operand should be a SSE register, source +operand should be an 8-bit immediate value. + "punpckhqdq" interleaves the high quad word of the source operand and the +high quad word of the destination operand and writes them to the destination +SSE register. "punpcklqdq" interleaves the low quad word of the source operand +and the low quad word of the destination operand and writes them to the +destination SSE register. The source operand can be a 128-bit memory location +or SSE register. + "movntdq" stores packed integer data from the SSE register to memory using +non-temporal hint. The source operand should be a SSE register, the +destination operand should be a 128-bit memory location. "movntpd" stores +packed double precision values from the SSE register to memory using a +non-temporal hint. Rules for operand are the same. "movnti" stores integer +from a general register to memory using a non-temporal hint. The source +operand should be a 32-bit general register, the destination operand should +be a 32-bit memory location. "maskmovdqu" stores selected bytes from the first +operand into a 128-bit memory location using a non-temporal hint. Both +operands should be a SSE registers, the second operand selects wich bytes from +the source operand are written to memory. The memory location is pointed by DI +(or EDI) register in the segment selected by DS and does not need to be +aligned. + "clflush" writes and invalidates the cache line associated with the address +of byte specified with the operand, which should be a 8-bit memory location. + "lfence" performs a serializing operation on all instruction loading from +memory that were issued prior to it. "mfence" performs a serializing operation +on all instruction accesing memory that were issued prior to it, and so it +combines the functions of "sfence" (described in previous section) and +"lfence" instructions. These instructions have no operands. + + +2.1.17 SSE3 instructions + +Prescott technology introduced some new instructions to improve the performance +of SSE and SSE2 - this extension is called SSE3. + "fisttp" behaves like the "fistp" instruction and accepts the same operands, +the only difference is that it always used truncation, irrespective of the +rounding mode. + "movshdup" loads into destination operand the 128-bit value obtained from +the source value of the same size by filling the each quad word with the two +duplicates of the value in its high double word. "movsldup" performs the same +action, except it duplicates the values of low double words. The destination +operand should be SSE register, the source operand can be SSE register or +128-bit memory location. + "movddup" loads the 64-bit source value and duplicates it into high and low +quad word of the destination operand. The destination operand should be SSE +register, the source operand can be SSE register or 64-bit memory location. + "lddqu" is functionally equivalent to "movdqu" with memory as source +operand, but it may improve performance when the source operand crosses a +cacheline boundary. The destination operand has to be SSE register, the source +operand must be 128-bit memory location. + "addsubps" performs single precision addition of second and fourth pairs and +single precision substracion of the first and third pairs of floating point +values in the operands. "addsubpd" performs double precision addition of the +second pair and double precision substraction of the first pair of floating +point values in the operand. "haddps" performs the addition of two single +precision values within the each quad word of source and destination operands, +and stores the results of such horizontal addition of values from destination +operand into low quad word of destination operand, and the results from the +source operand into high quad word of destination operand. "haddpd" performs +the addition of two double precision values within each operand, and stores +the result from destination operand into low quad word of destination operand, +and the result from source operand into high quad word of destination operand. +All these instruction need the destination operand to be SSE register, source +operand can be SSE register or 128-bit memory location. + "monitor" sets up an address range for monitoring of write-back stores. It +need its three operands to be EAX, ECX and EDX register in that order. "mwait" +waits for a write-back store to the address range set up by the "monitor" +instruction. It uses two operands with additional parameters, first being the +EAX and second the ECX register. + The functionality of SSE3 is further extended by the set of Supplemental +SSE3 instructions (SSSE3). They generally follow the same rules for operands +as all the MMX operations extended by SSE. + "phaddw" and "phaddd" perform the horizontal additional of the pairs of +adjacent values from both the source and destination operand, and stores the +sums into the destination (sums from the source operand go into lower part of +destination register). They operate on 16-bit or 32-bit chunks, respectively. +"phaddsw" performs the same operation on signed 16-bit packed values, but the +result of each addition is saturated. "phsubw" and "phsubd" analogously +perform the horizontal substraction of 16-bit or 32-bit packed value, and +"phsubsw" performs the horizontal substraction of signed 16-bit packed values +with saturation. + "pabsb", "pabsw" and "pabsd" calculate the absolute value of each signed +packed signed value in source operand and stores them into the destination +register. They operator on 8-bit, 16-bit and 32-bit elements respectively. + "pmaddubsw" multiplies signed 8-bit values from the source operand with the +corresponding unsigned 8-bit values from the destination operand to produce +intermediate 16-bit values, and every adjacent pair of those intermediate +values is then added horizontally and those 16-bit sums are stored into the +destination operand. + "pmulhrsw" multiplies corresponding 16-bit integers from the source and +destination operand to produce intermediate 32-bit values, and the 16 bits +next to the highest bit of each of those values are then rounded and packed +into the destination operand. + "pshufb" shuffles the bytes in the destination operand according to the +mask provided by source operand - each of the bytes in source operand is +an index of the target position for the corresponding byte in the destination. + "psignb", "psignw" and "psignd" perform the operation on 8-bit, 16-bit or +32-bit integers in destination operand, depending on the signs of the values +in the source. If the value in source is negative, the corresponding value in +the destination register is negated, if the value in source is positive, no +operation is performed on the corresponding value is performed, and if the +value in source is zero, the value in destination is zeroed, too. + "palignr" appends the source operand to the destination operand to form the +intermediate value of twice the size, and then extracts into the destination +register the 64 or 128 bits that are right-aligned to the byte offset +specified by the third operand, which should be an 8-bit immediate value. This +is the only SSSE3 instruction that takes three arguments. + + +2.1.18 AMD 3DNow! instructions + +The 3DNow! extension adds a new MMX instructions to those described in 2.1.14, +and introduces operation on the 64-bit packed floating point values, each +consisting of two single precision floating point values. + These instructions follow the same rules as the general MMX operations, the +destination operand should be a MMX register, the source operand can be a MMX +register or 64-bit memory location. "pavgusb" computes the rounded averages +of packed unsigned bytes. "pmulhrw" performs a signed multiplication of the +packed words, round the high word of each double word results and stores them +in the destination operand. "pi2fd" converts packed double word integers into +packed floating point values. "pf2id" converts packed floating point values +into packed double word integers using truncation. "pi2fw" converts packed +word integers into packed floating point values, only low words of each +double word in source operand are used. "pf2iw" converts packed floating +point values to packed word integers, results are extended to double words +using the sign extension. "pfadd" adds packed floating point values. "pfsub" +and "pfsubr" substracts packed floating point values, the first one substracts +source values from destination values, the second one substracts destination +values from the source values. "pfmul" multiplies packed floating point +values. "pfacc" adds the low and high floating point values of the destination +operand, storing the result in the low double word of destination, and adds +the low and high floating point values of the source operand, storing the +result in the high double word of destination. "pfnacc" substracts the high +floating point value of the destination operand from the low, storing the +result in the low double word of destination, and substracts the high floating +point value of the source operand from the low, storing the result in the high +double word of destination. "pfpnacc" substracts the high floating point value +of the destination operand from the low, storing the result in the low double +word of destination, and adds the low and high floating point values of the +source operand, storing the result in the high double word of destination. +"pfmax" and "pfmin" compute the maximum and minimum of floating point values. +"pswapd" reverses the high and low double word of the source operand. "pfrcp" +returns an estimates of the reciprocals of floating point values from the +source operand, "pfrsqrt" returns an estimates of the reciprocal square +roots of floating point values from the source operand, "pfrcpit1" performs +the first step in the Newton-Raphson iteration to refine the reciprocal +approximation produced by "pfrcp" instruction, "pfrsqit1" performs the first +step in the Newton-Raphson iteration to refine the reciprocal square root +approximation produced by "pfrsqrt" instruction, "pfrcpit2" performs the +second final step in the Newton-Raphson iteration to refine the reciprocal +approximation or the reciprocal square root approximation. "pfcmpeq", +"pfcmpge" and "pfcmpgt" compare the packed floating point values and sets +all bits or zeroes all bits of the correspoding data element in the +destination operand according to the result of comparison, first checks +whether values are equal, second checks whether destination value is greater +or equal to source value, third checks whether destination value is greater +than source value. + "prefetch" and "prefetchw" load the line of data from memory that contains +byte specified with the operand into the data cache, "prefetchw" instruction +should be used when the data in the cache line is expected to be modified, +otherwise the "prefetch" instruction should be used. The operand should be an +8-bit memory location. + "femms" performs a fast clear of MMX state. This instruction has no +operands. + + +2.1.19 The x86-64 long mode instructions + +The AMD64 and EM64T architectures (we will use the common name x86-64 for them +both) extend the x86 instruction set for the 64-bit processing. While legacy +and compatibility modes use the same set of registers and instructions, the +new long mode extends the x86 operations to 64 bits and introduces several new +registers. You can turn on generating the code for this mode with the "use64" +directive. + Each of the general purpose registers is extended to 64 bits and the eight +whole new general purpose registers and also eight new SSE registers are added. +See table 2.4 for the summary of new registers (only the ones that was not +listed in table 1.2). The general purpose registers of smallers sizes are the +low order portions of the larger ones. You can still access the "ah", "bh", +"ch" and "dh" registers in long mode, but you cannot use them in the same +instruction with any of the new registers. + + Table 2.4 New registers in long mode + /--------------------------------------------------\ + | Type | General | SSE | AVX | + |------|---------------------------|-------|-------| + | Bits | 8 | 16 | 32 | 64 | 128 | 256 | + |======|======|======|======|======|=======|=======| + | | | | | rax | | | + | | | | | rcx | | | + | | | | | rdx | | | + | | | | | rbx | | | + | | spl | | | rsp | | | + | | bpl | | | rbp | | | + | | sil | | | rsi | | | + | | dil | | | rdi | | | + | | r8b | r8w | r8d | r8 | xmm8 | ymm8 | + | | r9b | r9w | r9d | r9 | xmm9 | ymm9 | + | | r10b | r10w | r10d | r10 | xmm10 | ymm10 | + | | r11b | r11w | r11d | r11 | xmm11 | ymm11 | + | | r12b | r12w | r12d | r12 | xmm12 | ymm12 | + | | r13b | r13w | r13d | r13 | xmm13 | ymm13 | + | | r14b | r14w | r14d | r14 | xmm14 | ymm14 | + | | r15b | r15w | r15d | r15 | xmm15 | ymm15 | + \--------------------------------------------------/ + + In general any instruction from x86 architecture, which allowed 16-bit or +32-bit operand sizes, in long mode allows also the 64-bit operands. The 64-bit +registers should be used for addressing in long mode, the 32-bit addressing +is also allowed, but it's not possible to use the addresses based on 16-bit +registers. Below are the samples of new operations possible in long mode on the +example of "mov" instruction: + + mov rax,r8 ; transfer 64-bit general register + mov al,[rbx] ; transfer memory addressed by 64-bit register + +The long mode uses also the instruction pointer based addresses, you can +specify it manually with the special RIP register symbol, but such addressing +is also automatically generated by flat assembler, since there is no 64-bit +absolute addressing in long mode. You can still force the assembler to use the +32-bit absolute addressing by putting the "dword" size override for address +inside the square brackets. There is also one exception, where the 64-bit +absolute addressing is possible, it's the "mov" instruction with one of the +operand being accumulator register, and second being the memory operand. +To force the assembler to use the 64-bit absolute addressing there, use the +"qword" size operator for address inside the square brackets. When no size +operator is applied to address, assembler generates the optimal form +automatically. + + mov [qword 0],rax ; absolute 64-bit addressing + mov [dword 0],r15d ; absolute 32-bit addressing + mov [0],rsi ; automatic RIP-relative addressing + mov [rip+3],sil ; manual RIP-relative addressing + + Also as the immediate operands for 64-bit operations only the signed 32-bit +values are possible, with the only exception being the "mov" instruction with +destination operand being 64-bit general purpose register. Trying to force the +64-bit immediate with any other instruction will cause an error. + If any operation is performed on the 32-bit general registers in long mode, +the upper 32 bits of the 64-bit registers containing them are filled with +zeros. This is unlike the operations on 16-bit or 8-bit portions of those +registers, which preserve the upper bits. + Three new type conversion instructions are available. The "cdqe" sign +extends the double word in EAX into quad word and stores the result in RAX +register. "cqo" sign extends the quad word in RAX into double quad word and +stores the extra bits in the RDX register. These instructions have no +operands. "movsxd" sign extends the double word source operand, being either +the 32-bit register or memory, into 64-bit destination operand, which has to +be register. No analogous instruction is needed for the zero extension, since +it is done automatically by any operations on 32-bit registers, as noted in +previous paragraph. And the "movzx" and "movsx" instructions, conforming to +the general rule, can be used with 64-bit destination operand, allowing +extension of byte or word values into quad words. + All the binary arithmetic and logical instruction have been promoted to +allow 64-bit operands in long mode. The use of decimal arithmetic instructions +in long mode is prohibited. + The stack operations, like "push" and "pop" in long mode default to 64-bit +operands and it's not possible to use 32-bit operands with them. The "pusha" +and "popa" are disallowed in long mode. + The indirect near jumps and calls in long mode default to 64-bit operands +and it's not possible to use the 32-bit operands with them. On the other hand, +the indirect far jumps and calls allow any operands that were allowed by the +x86 architecture and also 80-bit memory operand is allowed (though only EM64T +seems to implement such variant), with the first eight bytes defining the +offset and two last bytes specifying the selector. The direct far jumps and +calls are not allowed in long mode. + The I/O instructions, "in", "out", "ins" and "outs" are the exceptional +instructions that are not extended to accept quad word operands in long mode. +But all other string operations are, and there are new short forms "movsq", +"cmpsq", "scasq", "lodsq" and "stosq" introduced for the variants of string +operations for 64-bit string elements. The RSI and RDI registers are used by +default to address the string elements. + The "lfs", "lgs" and "lss" instructions are extended to accept 80-bit source +memory operand with 64-bit destination register (though only EM64T seems to +implement such variant). The "lds" and "les" are disallowed in long mode. + The system instructions like "lgdt" which required the 48-bit memory operand, +in long mode require the 80-bit memory operand. + The "cmpxchg16b" is the 64-bit equivalent of "cmpxchg8b" instruction, it uses +the double quad word memory operand and 64-bit registers to perform the +analoguous operation. + The "fxsave64" and "fxrstor64" are new variants of "fxsave" and "fxrstor" +instructions, available only in long mode, which use a different format of +storage area in order to store some pointers in full 64-bit size. + "swapgs" is the new instruction, which swaps the contents of GS register and +the KernelGSbase model-specific register (MSR address 0C0000102h). + "syscall" and "sysret" is the pair of new instructions that provide the +functionality similar to "sysenter" and "sysexit" in long mode, where the +latter pair is disallowed. The "sysexitq" and "sysretq" mnemonics provide the +64-bit versions of "sysexit" and "sysret" instructions. + The "rdmsrq" and "wrmsrq" mnemonics are the 64-bit variants of the "rdmsr" +and "wrmsr" instructions. + + +2.1.20 SSE4 instructions + +There are actually three different sets of instructions under the name SSE4. +Intel designed two of them, SSE4.1 and SSE4.2, with latter extending the +former into the full Intel's SSE4 set. On the other hand, the implementation +by AMD includes only a few instructions from this set, but also contains +some additional instructions, that are called the SSE4a set. + The SSE4.1 instructions mostly follow the same rules for operands, as +the basic SSE operations, so they require destination operand to be SSE +register and source operand to be 128-bit memory location or SSE register, +and some operations require a third operand, the 8-bit immediate value. + "pmulld" performs a signed multiplication of the packed double words and +stores the low double words of the results in the destination operand. +"pmuldq" performs a two signed multiplications of the corresponding double +words in the lower quad words of operands, and stores the results as +packed quad words into the destination register. "pminsb" and "pmaxsb" +return the minimum or maximum values of packed signed bytes, "pminuw" and +"pmaxuw" return the minimum and maximum values of packed unsigned words, +"pminud", "pmaxud", "pminsd" and "pmaxsd" return minimum or maximum values +of packed unsigned or signed words. These instruction complement the +instructions computing packed minimum or maximum introduced by SSE. + "ptest" sets the ZF flag to one when the result of bitwise AND of the +both operands is zero, and zeroes the ZF otherwise. It also sets CF flag +to one, when the result of bitwise AND of the destination operand with +the bitwise NOT of the source operand is zero, and zeroes the CF otherwise. +"pcmpeqq" compares packed quad words for equality, and fills the +corresponding elements of destination operand with either ones or zeros, +depending on the result of comparison. + "packusdw" converts packed signed double words from both the source and +destination operand into the unsigned words using saturation, and stores +the eight resulting word values into the destination register. + "phminposuw" finds the minimum unsigned word value in source operand and +places it into the lowest word of destination operand, setting the remaining +upper bits of destination to zero. + "roundps", "roundss", "roundpd" and "roundsd" perform the rounding of packed +or individual floating point value of single or double precision, using the +rounding mode specified by the third operand. + + roundsd xmm0,xmm1,0011b ; round toward zero + + "dpps" calculates dot product of packed single precision floating point +values, that is it multiplies the corresponding pairs of values from source and +destination operand and then sums the products up. The high four bits of the +8-bit immediate third operand control which products are calculated and taken +to the sum, and the low four bits control, into which elements of destination +the resulting dot product is copied (the other elements are filled with zero). +"dppd" calculates dot product of packed double precision floating point values. +The bits 4 and 5 of third operand control, which products are calculated and +added, and bits 0 and 1 of this value control, which elements in destination +register should get filled with the result. "mpsadbw" calculates multiple sums +of absolute differences of unsigned bytes. The third operand controls, with +value in bits 0-1, which of the four-byte blocks in source operand is taken to +calculate the absolute differencies, and with value in bit 2, at which of the +two first four-byte block in destination operand start calculating multiple +sums. The sum is calculated from four absolute differencies between the +corresponding unsigned bytes in the source and destination block, and each next +sum is calculated in the same way, but taking the four bytes from destination +at the position one byte after the position of previous block. The four bytes +from the source stay the same each time. This way eight sums of absolute +differencies are calculated and stored as packed word values into the +destination operand. The instructions described in this paragraph follow the +same rules for operands, as "roundps" instruction. + "blendps", "blendvps", "blendpd" and "blendvpd" conditionally copy the +values from source operand into the destination operand, depending on the bits +of the mask provided by third operand. If a mask bit is set, the corresponding +element of source is copied into the same place in destination, otherwise this +position is destination is left unchanged. The rules for the first two operands +are the same, as for general SSE instructions. "blendps" and "blendpd" need +third operand to be 8-bit immediate, and they operate on single or double +precision values, respectively. "blendvps" and "blendvpd" require third operand +to be the XMM0 register. + + blendvps xmm3,xmm7,xmm0 ; blend according to mask + + "pblendw" conditionally copies word elements from the source operand into the +destination, depending on the bits of mask provided by third operand, which +needs to be 8-bit immediate value. "pblendvb" conditionally copies byte +elements from the source operands into destination, depending on mask defined +by the third operand, which has to be XMM0 register. These instructions follow +the same rules for operands as "blendps" and "blendvps" instructions, +respectively. + "insertps" inserts a single precision floating point value taken from the +position in source operand specified by bits 6-7 of third operand into location +in destination register selected by bits 4-5 of third operand. Additionally, +the low four bits of third operand control, which elements in destination +register will be set to zero. The first two operands follow the same rules as +for the general SSE operation, the third operand should be 8-bit immediate. + "extractps" extracts a single precision floating point value taken from the +location in source operand specified by low two bits of third operand, and +stores it into the destination operand. The destination can be a 32-bit memory +value or general purpose register, the source operand must be SSE register, +and the third operand should be 8-bit immediate value. + + extractps edx,xmm3,3 ; extract the highest value + + "pinsrb", "pinsrd" and "pinsrq" copy a byte, double word or quad word from +the source operand into the location of destination operand determined by the +third operand. The destination operand has to be SSE register, the source +operand can be a memory location of appropriate size, or the 32-bit general +purpose register (but 64-bit general purpose register for "pinsrq", which is +only available in long mode), and the third operand has to be 8-bit immediate +value. These instructions complement the "pinsrw" instruction operating on SSE +register destination, which was introduced by SSE2. + + pinsrd xmm4,eax,1 ; insert double word into second position + + "pextrb", "pextrw", "pextrd" and "pextrq" copy a byte, word, double word or +quad word from the location in source operand specified by third operand, into +the destination. The source operand should be SSE register, the third operand +should be 8-bit immediate, and the destination operand can be memory location +of appropriate size, or the 32-bit general purpose register (but 64-bit general +purpose register for "pextrq", which is only available in long mode). The +"pextrw" instruction with SSE register as source was already introduced by +SSE2, but SSE4 extends it to allow memory operand as destination. + + pextrw [ebx],xmm3,7 ; extract highest word into memory + + "pmovsxbw" and "pmovzxbw" perform sign extension or zero extension of eight +byte values from the source operand into packed word values in destination +operand, which has to be SSE register. The source can be 64-bit memory or SSE +register - when it is register, only its low portion is used. "pmovsxbd" and +"pmovzxbd" perform sign extension or zero extension of the four byte values +from the source operand into packed double word values in destination operand, +the source can be 32-bit memory or SSE register. "pmovsxbq" and "pmovzxbq" +perform sign extension or zero extension of the two byte values from the +source operand into packed quad word values in destination operand, the source +can be 16-bit memory or SSE register. "pmovsxwd" and "pmovzxwd" perform sign +extension or zero extension of the four word values from the source operand +into packed double words in destination operand, the source can be 64-bit +memory or SSE register. "pmovsxwq" and "pmovzxwq" perform sign extension or +zero extension of the two word values from the source operand into packed quad +words in destination operand, the source can be 32-bit memory or SSE register. +"pmovsxdq" and "pmovzxdq" perform sign extension or zero extension of the two +double word values from the source operand into packed quad words in +destination operand, the source can be 64-bit memory or SSE register. + + pmovzxbq xmm0,word [si] ; zero-extend bytes to quad words + pmovsxwq xmm0,xmm1 ; sign-extend words to quad words + + "movntdqa" loads double quad word from the source operand to the destination +using a non-temporal hint. The destination operand should be SSE register, +and the source operand should be 128-bit memory location. + The SSE4.2, described below, adds not only some new operations on SSE +registers, but also introduces some completely new instructions operating on +general purpose registers only. + "pcmpistri" compares two zero-ended (implicit length) strings provided in +its source and destination operand and generates an index stored to ECX; +"pcmpistrm" performs the same comparison and generates a mask stored to XMM0. +"pcmpestri" compares two strings of explicit lengths, with length provided +in EAX for the destination operand and in EDX for the source operand, and +generates an index stored to ECX; "pcmpestrm" performs the same comparision +and generates a mask stored to XMM0. The source and destination operand follow +the same rules as for general SSE instructions, the third operand should be +8-bit immediate value determining the details of performed operation - refer to +Intel documentation for information on those details. + "pcmpgtq" compares packed quad words, and fills the corresponding elements of +destination operand with either ones or zeros, depending on whether the value +in destination is greater than the one in source, or not. This instruction +follows the same rules for operands as "pcmpeqq". + "crc32" accumulates a CRC32 value for the source operand starting with +initial value provided by destination operand, and stores the result in +destination. Unless in long mode, the destination operand should be a 32-bit +general purpose register, and the source operand can be a byte, word, or double +word register or memory location. In long mode the destination operand can +also be a 64-bit general purpose register, and the source operand in such case +can be a byte or quad word register or memory location. + + crc32 eax,dl ; accumulate CRC32 on byte value + crc32 eax,word [ebx] ; accumulate CRC32 on word value + crc32 rax,qword [rbx] ; accumulate CRC32 on quad word value + + "popcnt" calculates the number of bits set in the source operand, which can +be 16-bit, 32-bit, or 64-bit general purpose register or memory location, +and stores this count in the destination operand, which has to be register of +the same size as source operand. The 64-bit variant is available only in long +mode. + + popcnt ecx,eax ; count bits set to 1 + + The SSE4a extension, which also includes the "popcnt" instruction introduced +by SSE4.2, at the same time adds the "lzcnt" instruction, which follows the +same syntax, and calculates the count of leading zero bits in source operand +(if the source operand is all zero bits, the total number of bits in source +operand is stored in destination). + "extrq" extract the sequence of bits from the low quad word of SSE register +provided as first operand and stores them at the low end of this register, +filling the remaining bits in the low quad word with zeros. The position of bit +string and its length can either be provided with two 8-bit immediate values +as second and third operand, or by SSE register as second operand (and there +is no third operand in such case), which should contain position value in bits +8-13 and length of bit string in bits 0-5. + + extrq xmm0,8,7 ; extract 8 bits from position 7 + extrq xmm0,xmm5 ; extract bits defined by register + + "insertq" writes the sequence of bits from the low quad word of the source +operand into specified position in low quad word of the destination operand, +leaving the other bits in low quad word of destination intact. The position +where bits should be written and the length of bit string can either be +provided with two 8-bit immediate values as third and fourth operand, or by +the bit fields in source operand (and there are only two operands in such +case), which should contain position value in bits 72-77 and length of bit +string in bits 64-69. + + insertq xmm1,xmm0,4,2 ; insert 4 bits at position 2 + insertq xmm1,xmm0 ; insert bits defined by register + + "movntss" and "movntsd" store single or double precision floating point +value from the source SSE register into 32-bit or 64-bit destination memory +location respectively, using non-temporal hint. + + +2.1.21 AVX instructions + +The Advanced Vector Extensions introduce instructions that are new variants +of SSE instructions, with new scheme of encoding that allows extended syntax +having a destination operand separate from all the source operands. It also +introduces 256-bit AVX registers, which extend up the old 128-bit SSE +registers. Any AVX instruction that puts some result into SSE register, puts +zero bits into high portion of the AVX register containing it. + The AVX version of SSE instruction has the mnemonic obtained by prepending +SSE instruction name with "v". For any SSE arithmetic instruction which had a +destination operand also being used as one of the source values, the AVX +variant has a new syntax with three operands - the destination and two sources. +The destination and first source can be SSE registers, and second source can be +SSE register or memory. If the operation is performed on single pair of values, +the remaining bits of first source SSE register are copied into the the +destination register. + + vsubss xmm0,xmm2,xmm3 ; substract two 32-bit floats + vmulsd xmm0,xmm7,qword [esi] ; multiply two 64-bit floats + +In case of packed operations, each instruction can also operate on the 256-bit +data size when the AVX registers are specified instead of SSE registers, and +the size of memory operand is also doubled then. + + vaddps ymm1,ymm5,yword [esi] ; eight sums of 32-bit float pairs + +The instructions that operate on packed integer types (in particular the ones +that earlier had been promoted from MMX to SSE) also acquired the new syntax +with three operands, however they are only allowed to operate on 128-bit +packed types and thus cannot use the whole AVX registers. + + vpavgw xmm3,xmm0,xmm2 ; average of 16-bit integers + vpslld xmm1,xmm0,1 ; shift double words left + +If the SSE version of instruction had a syntax with three operands, the third +one being an immediate value, the AVX version of such instruction takes four +operands, with immediate remaining the last one. + + vshufpd ymm0,ymm1,ymm2,10010011b ; shuffle 64-bit floats + vpalignr xmm0,xmm4,xmm2,3 ; extract byte aligned value + +The promotion to new syntax according to the rules described above has been +applied to all the instructions from SSE extensions up to SSE4, with the +exceptions described below. + "vdppd" instruction has syntax extended to four operans, but it does not +have a 256-bit version. + The are a few instructions, namely "vsqrtpd", "vsqrtps", "vrcpps" and +"vrsqrtps", which can operate on 256-bit data size, but retained the syntax +with only two operands, because they use data from only one source: + + vsqrtpd ymm1,ymm0 ; put square roots into other register + +In a similar way "vroundpd" and "vroundps" retained the syntax with three +operands, the last one being immediate value. + + vroundps ymm0,ymm1,0011b ; round toward zero + + Also some of the operations on packed integers kept their two-operand or +three-operand syntax while being promoted to AVX version. In such case these +instructions follow exactly the same rules for operands as their SSE +counterparts (since operations on packed integers do not have 256-bit variants +in AVX extension). These include "vpcmpestri", "vpcmpestrm", "vpcmpistri", +"vpcmpistrm", "vphminposuw", "vpshufd", "vpshufhw", "vpshuflw". And there are +more instructions that in AVX versions keep exactly the same syntax for +operands as the one from SSE, without any additional options: "vcomiss", +"vcomisd", "vcvtss2si", "vcvtsd2si", "vcvttss2si", "vcvttsd2si", "vextractps", +"vpextrb", "vpextrw", "vpextrd", "vpextrq", "vmovd", "vmovq", "vmovntdqa", +"vmaskmovdqu", "vpmovmskb", "vpmovsxbw", "vpmovsxbd", "vpmovsxbq", "vpmovsxwd", +"vpmovsxwq", "vpmovsxdq", "vpmovzxbw", "vpmovzxbd", "vpmovzxbq", "vpmovzxwd", +"vpmovzxwq" and "vpmovzxdq". + The move and conversion instructions have mostly been promoted to allow +256-bit size operands in addition to the 128-bit variant with syntax identical +to that from SSE version of the same instruction. Each of the "vcvtdq2ps", +"vcvtps2dq" and "vcvttps2dq", "vmovaps", "vmovapd", "vmovups", "vmovupd", +"vmovdqa", "vmovdqu", "vlddqu", "vmovntps", "vmovntpd", "vmovntdq", +"vmovsldup", "vmovshdup", "vmovmskps" and "vmovmskpd" inherits the 128-bit +syntax from SSE without any changes, and also allows a new form with 256-bit +operands in place of 128-bit ones. + + vmovups [edi],ymm6 ; store unaligned 256-bit data + + "vmovddup" has the identical 128-bit syntax as its SSE version, and it also +has a 256-bit version, which stores the duplicates of the lowest quad word +from the source operand in the lower half of destination operand, and in the +upper half of destination the duplicates of the low quad word from the upper +half of source. Both source and destination operands need then to be 256-bit +values. + "vmovlhps" and "vmovhlps" have only 128-bit versions, and each takes three +operands, which all must be SSE registers. "vmovlhps" copies two single +precision values from the low quad word of second source register to the high +quad word of destination register, and copies the low quad word of first +source register into the low quad word of destination register. "vmovhlps" +copies two single precision values from the high quad word of second source +register to the low quad word of destination register, and copies the high +quad word of first source register into the high quad word of destination +register. + "vmovlps", "vmovhps", "vmovlpd" and "vmovhpd" have only 128-bit versions and +their syntax varies depending on whether memory operand is a destination or +source. When memory is destination, the syntax is identical to the one of +equivalent SSE instruction, and when memory is source, the instruction requires +three operands, first two being SSE registers and the third one 64-bit memory. +The value put into destination is then the value copied from first source with +either low or high quad word replaced with value from second source (the +memory operand). + + vmovhps [esi],xmm7 ; store upper half to memory + vmovlps xmm0,xmm7,[ebx] ; low from memory, rest from register + + "vmovss" and "vmovsd" have syntax identical to their SSE equivalents as long +as one of the operands is memory, while the versions that operate purely on +registers require three operands (each being SSE register). The value stored +in destination is then the value copied from first source with lowest data +element replaced with the lowest value from second source. + + vmovss xmm3,[edi] ; low from memory, rest zeroed + vmovss xmm0,xmm1,xmm2 ; one value from xmm2, three from xmm1 + + "vcvtss2sd", "vcvtsd2ss", "vcvtsi2ss" and "vcvtsi2d" use the three-operand +syntax, where destination and first source are always SSE registers, and the +second source follows the same rules and the source in syntax of equivalent +SSE instruction. The value stored in destination is then the value copied from +first source with lowest data element replaced with the result of conversion. + + vcvtsi2sd xmm4,xmm4,ecx ; 32-bit integer to 64-bit float + vcvtsi2ss xmm0,xmm0,rax ; 64-bit integer to 32-bit float + + "vcvtdq2pd" and "vcvtps2pd" allow the same syntax as their SSE equivalents, +plus the new variants with AVX register as destination and SSE register or +128-bit memory as source. Analogously "vcvtpd2dq", "vcvttpd2dq" and +"vcvtpd2ps", in addition to variant with syntax identical to SSE version, +allow a variant with SSE register as destination and AVX register or 256-bit +memory as source. + "vinsertps", "vpinsrb", "vpinsrw", "vpinsrd", "vpinsrq" and "vpblendw" use +a syntax with four operands, where destination and first source have to be SSE +registers, and the third and fourth operand follow the same rules as second +and third operand in the syntax of equivalent SSE instruction. Value stored in +destination is the the value copied from first source with some data elements +replaced with values extracted from the second source, analogously to the +operation of corresponding SSE instruction. + + vpinsrd xmm0,xmm0,eax,3 ; insert double word + + "vblendvps", "vblendvpd" and "vpblendvb" use a new syntax with four register +operands: destination, two sources and a mask, where second source can also be +a memory operand. "vblendvps" and "vblendvpd" have 256-bit variant, where +operands are AVX registers or 256-bit memory, as well as 128-bit variant, +which has operands being SSE registers or 128-bit memory. "vpblendvb" has only +a 128-bit variant. Value stored in destination is the value copied from the +first source with some data elements replaced, according to mask, by values +from the second source. + + vblendvps ymm3,ymm1,ymm2,ymm7 ; blend according to mask + + "vptest" allows the same syntax as its SSE version and also has a 256-bit +version, with both operands doubled in size. There are also two new +instructions, "vtestps" and "vtestpd", which perform analogous tests, but only +of the sign bits of corresponding single precision or double precision values, +and set the ZF and CF accordingly. They follow the same syntax rules as +"vptest". + + vptest ymm0,yword [ebx] ; test 256-bit values + vtestpd xmm0,xmm1 ; test sign bits of 64-bit floats + + "vbroadcastss", "vbroadcastsd" and "vbroadcastf128" are new instructions, +which broadcast the data element defined by source operand into all elements +of corresponing size in the destination register. "vbroadcastss" needs +source to be 32-bit memory and destination to be either SSE or AVX register. +"vbroadcastsd" requires 64-bit memory as source, and AVX register as +destination. "vbroadcastf128" requires 128-bit memory as source, and AVX +register as destination. + + vbroadcastss ymm0,dword [eax] ; get eight copies of value + + "vinsertf128" is the new instruction, which takes four operands. The +destination and first source have to be AVX registers, second source can be +SSE register or 128-bit memory location, and fourth operand should be an +immediate value. It stores in destination the value obtained by taking +contents of first source and replacing one of its 128-bit units with value of +the second source. The lowest bit of fourth operand specifies at which +position that replacement is done (either 0 or 1). + "vextractf128" is the new instruction with three operands. The destination +needs to be SSE register or 128-bit memory location, the source must be AVX +register, and the third operand should be an immediate value. It extracts +into destination one of the 128-bit units from source. The lowest bit of third +operand specifies, which unit is extracted. + "vmaskmovps" and "vmaskmovpd" are the new instructions with three operands +that selectively store in destination the elements from second source +depending on the sign bits of corresponding elements from first source. These +instructions can operate on either 128-bit data (SSE registers) or 256-bit +data (AVX registers). Either destination or second source has to be a memory +location of appropriate size, the two other operands should be registers. + + vmaskmovps [edi],xmm0,xmm5 ; conditionally store + vmaskmovpd ymm5,ymm0,[esi] ; conditionally load + + "vpermilpd" and "vpermilps" are the new instructions with three operands +that permute the values from first source according to the control fields from +second source and put the result into destination operand. It allows to use +either three SSE registers or three AVX registers as its operands, the second +source can be a memory of size equal to the registers used. In alternative +form the second source can be immediate value and then the first source +can be a memory location of the size equal to destination register. + "vperm2f128" is the new instruction with four operands, which selects +128-bit blocks of floating point data from first and second source according +to the bit fields from fourth operand, and stores them in destination. +Destination and first source need to be AVX registers, second source can be +AVX register or 256-bit memory area, and fourth operand should be an immediate +value. + + vperm2f128 ymm0,ymm6,ymm7,12h ; permute 128-bit blocks + + "vzeroall" instruction sets all the AVX registers to zero. "vzeroupper" sets +the upper 128-bit portions of all AVX registers to zero, leaving the SSE +registers intact. These new instructions take no operands. + "vldmxcsr" and "vstmxcsr" are the AVX versions of "ldmxcsr" and "stmxcsr" +instructions. The rules for their operands remain unchanged. + + +2.1.22 AVX2 instructions + +The AVX2 extension allows all the AVX instructions operating on packed integers +to use 256-bit data types, and introduces some new instructions as well. + The AVX instructions that operate on packed integers and had only a 128-bit +variants, have been supplemented with 256-bit variants, and thus their syntax +rules became analogous to AVX instructions operating on packed floating point +types. + + vpsubb ymm0,ymm0,[esi] ; substract 32 packed bytes + vpavgw ymm3,ymm0,ymm2 ; average of 16-bit integers + +However there are some instructions that have not been equipped with the +256-bit variants. "vpcmpestri", "vpcmpestrm", "vpcmpistri", "vpcmpistrm", +"vpextrb", "vpextrw", "vpextrd", "vpextrq", "vpinsrb", "vpinsrw", "vpinsrd", +"vpinsrq" and "vphminposuw" are not affected by AVX2 and allow only the +128-bit operands. + The packed shift instructions, which allowed the third operand specifying +amount to be SSE register or 128-bit memory location, use the same rules +for the third operand in their 256-bit variant. + + vpsllw ymm2,ymm2,xmm4 ; shift words left + vpsrad ymm0,ymm3,xword [ebx] ; shift double words right + + There are also new packed shift instructions with standard three-operand AVX +syntax, which shift each element from first source by the amount specified in +corresponding element of second source, and store the results in destination. +"vpsllvd" shifts 32-bit elements left, "vpsllvq" shifts 64-bit elements left, +"vpsrlvd" shifts 32-bit elements right logically, "vpsrlvq" shifts 64-bit +elements right logically and "vpsravd" shifts 32-bit elements right +arithmetically. + The sign-extend and zero-extend instructions, which in AVX versions allowed +source operand to be SSE register or a memory of specific size, in the new +256-bit variant need memory of that size doubled or SSE register as source and +AVX register as destination. + + vpmovzxbq ymm0,dword [esi] ; bytes to quad words + + Also "vmovntdqa" has been upgraded with 256-bit variant, so it allows to +transfer 256-bit value from memory to AVX register, it needs memory address +to be aligned to 32 bytes. + "vpmaskmovd" and "vpmaskmovq" are the new instructions with syntax identical +to "vmaskmovps" or "vmaskmovpd", and they performs analogous operation on +packed 32-bit or 64-bit values. + "vinserti128", "vextracti128", "vbroadcasti128" and "vperm2i128" are the new +instructions with syntax identical to "vinsertf128", "vextractf128", +"vbroadcastf128" and "vperm2f128" respectively, and they perform analogous +operations on 128-bit blocks of integer data. + "vbroadcastss" and "vbroadcastsd" instructions have been extended to allow +SSE register as a source operand (which in AVX could only be a memory). + "vpbroadcastb", "vpbroadcastw", "vpbroadcastd" and "vpbroadcastq" are the +new instructions which broadcast the byte, word, double word or quad word from +the source operand into all elements of corresponing size in the destination +register. The destination operand can be either SSE or AVX register, and the +source operand can be SSE register or memory of size equal to the size of data +element. + + vpbroadcastb ymm0,byte [ebx] ; get 32 identical bytes + + "vpermd" and "vpermps" are new three-operand instructions, which use each +32-bit element from first source as an index of element in second source which +is copied into destination at position corresponding to element containing +index. The destination and first source have to be AVX registers, and the +second source can be AVX register or 256-bit memory. + "vpermq" and "vpermpd" are new three-operand instructions, which use 2-bit +indexes from the immediate value specified as third operand to determine which +element from source store at given position in destination. The destination +has to be AVX register, source can be AVX register or 256-bit memory, and the +third operand must be 8-bit immediate value. + The family of new instructions performing "gather" operation have special +syntax, as in their memory operand they use addressing mode that is unique to +them. The base of address can be a 32-bit or 64-bit general purpose register +(the latter only in long mode), and the index (possibly multiplied by scale +value, as in standard addressing) is specified by SSE or AVX register. It is +possible to use only index without base and any numerical displacement can be +added to the address. Each of those instructions takes three operands. First +operand is the destination register, second operand is memory addressed with +a vector index, and third operand is register containing a mask. The most +significant bit of each element of mask determines whether a value will be +loaded from memory into corresponding element in destination. The address of +each element to load is determined by using the corresponding element from +index register in memory operand to calculate final address with given base +and displacement. When the index register contains less elements than the +destination and mask registers, the higher elements of destination are zeroed. +After the value is successfuly loaded, the corresponding element in mask +register is set to zero. The destination, index and mask should all be +distinct registers, it is not allowed to use the same register in two +different roles. + "vgatherdps" loads single precision floating point values addressed by +32-bit indexes. The destination, index and mask should all be registers of the +same type, either SSE or AVX. The data addressed by memory operand is 32-bit +in size. + + vgatherdps xmm0,[eax+xmm1],xmm3 ; gather four floats + vgatherdps ymm0,[ebx+ymm7*4],ymm3 ; gather eight floats + + "vgatherqps" loads single precision floating point values addressed by +64-bit indexes. The destination and mask should always be SSE registers, while +index register can be either SSE or AVX register. The data addressed by memory +operand is 32-bit in size. + + vgatherqps xmm0,[xmm2],xmm3 ; gather two floats + vgatherqps xmm0,[ymm2+64],xmm3 ; gather four floats + + "vgatherdpd" loads double precision floating point values addressed by +32-bit indexes. The index register should always be SSE register, the +destination and mask should be two registers of the same type, either SSE or +AVX. The data addressed by memory operand is 64-bit in size. + + vgatherdpd xmm0,[ebp+xmm1],xmm3 ; gather two doubles + vgatherdpd ymm0,[xmm3*8],ymm5 ; gather four doubles + + "vgatherqpd" loads double precision floating point values addressed by +64-bit indexes. The destination, index and mask should all be registers of the +same type, either SSE or AVX. The data addressed by memory operand is 64-bit +in size. + "vpgatherdd" and "vpgatherqd" load 32-bit values addressed by either 32-bit +or 64-bit indexes. They follow the same rules as "vgatherdps" and "vgatherqps" +respectively. + "vpgatherdq" and "vpgatherqq" load 64-bit values addressed by either 32-bit +or 64-bit indexes. They follow the same rules as "vgatherdpd" and "vgatherqpd" +respectively. + + +2.1.23 Auxiliary sets of computational instructions + + There is a number of additional instruction set extensions related to +AVX. They introduce new vector instructions (and sometimes also their SSE +equivalents that use classic instruction encoding), and even some new +instructions operating on general registers that use the AVX-like encoding +allowing the extended syntax with separate destination and source operands. +The CPU support for each of these instruction sets needs to be determined +separately. + The AES extension provides a specialized set of instructions for the +purpose of cryptographic computations defined by Advanced Encryption Standard. +Each of these instructions has two versions: the AVX one and the one with +SSE-like syntax that uses classic encoding. Refer to the Intel manuals for the +details of operation of these instructions. + "aesenc" and "aesenclast" perform a single round of AES encryption on data +from first source with a round key from second source, and store result in +destination. The destination and first source are SSE registers, and the +second source can be SSE register or 128-bit memory. The AVX versions of these +instructions, "vaesenc" and "vaesenclast", use the syntax with three operands, +while the SSE-like version has only two operands, with first operand being +both the destination and first source. + "aesdec" and "aesdeclast" perform a single round of AES decryption on data +from first source with a round key from second source. The syntax rules for +them and their AVX versions are the same as for "aesenc". + "aesimc" performs the InvMixColumns transformation of source operand and +store the result in destination. Both "aesimc" and "vaesimc" use only two +operands, destination being SSE register, and source being SSE register or +128-bit memory location. + "aeskeygenassist" is a helper instruction for generating the round key. +It needs three operands: destination being SSE register, source being SSE +register or 128-bit memory, and third operand being 8-bit immediate value. +The AVX version of this instruction uses the same syntax. + The CLMUL extension introduces just one instruction, "pclmulqdq", and its +AVX version as well. This instruction performs a carryless multiplication of +two 64-bit values selected from first and second source according to the bit +fields in immediate value. The destination and first source are SSE registers, +second source is SSE register or 128-bit memory, and immediate value is +provided as last operand. "vpclmulqdq" takes four operands, while "pclmulqdq" +takes only three operands, with the first one serving both the role of +destination and first source. + The FMA (Fused Multiply-Add) extension introduces additional AVX +instructions which perform multiplication and summation as single operation. +Each one takes three operands, first one serving both the role of destination +and first source, and the following ones being the second and third source. +The mnemonic of FMA instruction is obtained by appending to "vf" prefix: first +either "m" or "nm" to select whether result of multiplication should be taken +as-is or negated, then either "add" or "sub" to select whether third value +will be added to the product or substracted from the product, then either +"132", "213" or "231" to select which source operands are multiplied and which +one is added or substracted, and finally the type of data on which the +instruction operates, either "ps", "pd", "ss" or "sd". As it was with SSE +instructions promoted to AVX, instructions operating on packed floating point +values allow 128-bit or 256-bit syntax, in former all the operands are SSE +registers, but the third one can also be a 128-bit memory, in latter the +operands are AVX registers and the third one can also be a 256-bit memory. +Instructions that compute just one floating point result need operands to be +SSE registers, and the third operand can also be a memory, either 32-bit for +single precision or 64-bit for double precision. + + vfmsub231ps ymm1,ymm2,ymm3 ; multiply and substract + vfnmadd132sd xmm0,xmm5,[ebx] ; multiply, negate and add + +In addition to the instructions created by the rule described above, there are +families of instructions with mnemonics starting with either "vfmaddsub" or +"vfmsubadd", followed by either "132", "213" or "231" and then either "ps" or +"pd" (the operation must always be on packed values in this case). They add +to the result of multiplication or substract from it depending on the position +of value in packed data - instructions from the "vfmaddsub" group add when the +position is odd and substract when the position is even, instructions from the +"vfmsubadd" group add when the position is even and subtstract when the +position is odd. The rules for operands are the same as for other FMA +instructions. + The FMA4 instructions are similar to FMA, but use syntax with four operands +and thus allow destination to be different than all the sources. Their +mnemonics are identical to FMA instructions with the "132", "213" or "231" cut +out, as having separate destination operand makes such selection of operands +superfluous. The multiplication is always performed on values from the first +and second source, and then the value from third source is added or +substracted. Either second or third source can be a memory operand, and the +rules for the sizes of operands are the same as for FMA instructions. + + vfmaddpd ymm0,ymm1,[esi],ymm2 ; multiply and add + vfmsubss xmm0,xmm1,xmm2,[ebx] ; multiply and substract + + The F16C extension consists of two instructions, "vcvtps2ph" and +"vcvtph2ps", which convert floating point values between single precision and +half precision (the 16-bit floating point format). "vcvtps2ph" takes three +operands: destination, source, and rounding controls. The third operand is +always an immediate, the source is either SSE or AVX register containing +single precision values, and the destination is SSE register or memory, the +size of memory is 64 bits when the source is SSE register and 128 bits when +the source is AVX register. "vcvtph2ps" takes two operands, the destination +that can be SSE or AVX register, and the source that is SSE register or memory +with size of the half of destination operand's size. + The AMD XOP extension introduces a number of new vector instructions with +encoding and syntax analogous to AVX instructions. "vfrczps", "vfrczss", +"vfrczpd" and "vfrczsd" extract fractional portions of single or double +precision values, they all take two operands. The packed operations allow +either SSE or AVX register as destination, for the other two it has to be SSE +register. Source can be register of the same type as destination, or memory +of appropriate size (256-bit for destination being AVX register, 128-bit for +packed operation with destination being SSE register, 64-bit for operation +on a solitary double precision value and 32-bit for operation on a solitary +single precision value). + + vfrczps ymm0,[esi] ; load fractional parts + + "vpcmov" copies bits from either first or second source into destination +depending on the values of corresponding bits in the fourth operand (the +selector). If the bit in selector is set, the corresponding bit from first +source is copied into the same position in destination, otherwise the bit from +second source is copied. Either second source or selector can be memory +location, 128-bit or 256-bit depending on whether SSE registers or AVX +registers are specified as the other operands. + + vpcmov xmm0,xmm1,xmm2,[ebx] ; selector in memory + vpcmov ymm0,ymm5,[esi],ymm2 ; source in memory + +The family of packed comparison instructions take four operands, the +destination and first source being SSE register, second source being SSE +register or 128-bit memory and the fourth operand being immediate value +defining the type of comparison. The mnemonic or instruction is created +by appending to "vpcom" prefix either "b" or "ub" to compare signed or +unsigned bytes, "w" or "uw" to compare signed or unsigned words, "d" or "ud" +to compare signed or unsigned double words, "q" or "uq" to compare signed or +unsigned quad words. The respective values from the first and second source +are compared and the corresponding data element in destination is set to +either all ones or all zeros depending on the result of comparison. The fourth +operand has to specify one of the eight comparison types (table 2.5). All +these instruction have also variants with only three operands and the type +of comparison encoded within the instruction name by inserting the comparison +mnemonic after "vpcom". + + vpcomb xmm0,xmm1,xmm2,4 ; test for equal bytes + vpcomgew xmm0,xmm1,[ebx] ; compare signed words + + Table 2.5 XOP comparisons + /-------------------------------------------\ + | Code | Mnemonic | Description | + |======|==========|=========================| + | 0 | lt | less than | + | 1 | le | less than or equal | + | 2 | gt | greater than | + | 3 | ge | greater than or equal | + | 4 | eq | equal | + | 5 | neq | not equal | + | 6 | false | false | + | 7 | true | true | + \-------------------------------------------/ + + "vpermil2ps" and "vpermil2pd" set the elements in destination register to +zero or to a value selected from first or second source depending on the +corresponding bit fields from the fourth operand (the selector) and the +immediate value provided in fifth operand. Refer to the AMD manuals for the +detailed explanation of the operation performed by these instructions. Each +of the first four operands can be a register, and either second source or +selector can be memory location, 128-bit or 256-bit depending on whether SSE +registers or AVX registers are used for the other operands. + + vpermil2ps ymm0,ymm3,ymm7,ymm2,0 ; permute from two sources + + "vphaddbw" adds pairs of adjacent signed bytes to form 16-bit values and +stores them at the same positions in destination. "vphaddubw" does the same +but treats the bytes as unsigned. "vphaddbd" and "vphaddubd" sum all bytes +(either signed or unsigned) in each four-byte block to 32-bit results, +"vphaddbq" and "vphaddubq" sum all bytes in each eight-byte block to +64-bit results, "vphaddwd" and "vphadduwd" add pairs of words to 32-bit +results, "vphaddwq" and "vphadduwq" sum all words in each four-word block to +64-bit results, "vphadddq" and "vphaddudq" add pairs of double words to 64-bit +results. "vphsubbw" substracts in each two-byte block the byte at higher +position from the one at lower position, and stores the result as a signed +16-bit value at the corresponding position in destination, "vphsubwd" +substracts in each two-word block the word at higher position from the one at +lower position and makes signed 32-bit results, "vphsubdq" substract in each +block of two double word the one at higher position from the one at lower +position and makes signed 64-bit results. Each of these instructions takes +two operands, the destination being SSE register, and the source being SSE +register or 128-bit memory. + + vphadduwq xmm0,xmm1 ; sum quadruplets of words + + "vpmacsww" and "vpmacssww" multiply the corresponding signed 16-bit values +from the first and second source and then add the products to the parallel +values from the third source, then "vpmacsww" takes the lowest 16 bits of the +result and "vpmacssww" saturates the result down to 16-bit value, and they +store the final 16-bit results in the destination. "vpmacsdd" and "vpmacssdd" +perform the analogous operation on 32-bit values. "vpmacswd" and "vpmacswd" do +the same calculation only on the low 16-bit values from each 32-bit block and +form the 32-bit results. "vpmacsdql" and "vpmacssdql" perform such operation +on the low 32-bit values from each 64-bit block and form the 64-bit results, +while "vpmacsdqh" and "vpmacssdqh" do the same on the high 32-bit values from +each 64-bit block, also forming the 64-bit results. "vpmadcswd" and +"vpmadcsswd" multiply the corresponding signed 16-bit value from the first +and second source, then sum all the four products and add this sum to each +16-bit element from third source, storing the truncated or saturated result +in destination. All these instructions take four operands, the second source +can be 128-bit memory or SSE register, all the other operands have to be +SSE registers. + + vpmacsdd xmm6,xmm1,[ebx],xmm6 ; accumulate product + + "vpperm" selects bytes from first and second source, optionally applies a +separate transformation to each of them, and stores them in the destination. +The bit fields in fourth operand (the selector) specify for each position in +destination what byte from which source is taken and what operation is applied +to it before it is stored there. Refer to the AMD manuals for the detailed +information about these bit fields. This instruction takes four operands, +either second source or selector can be a 128-bit memory (or they can be SSE +registers both), all the other operands have to be SSE registers. + "vpshlb", "vpshlw", "vpshld" and "vpshlq" shift logically bytes, words, double +words or quad words respectively. The amount of bits to shift by is specified +for each element separately by the signed byte placed at the corresponding +position in the third operand. The source containing elements to shift is +provided as second operand. Either second or third operand can be 128-bit +memory (or they can be SSE registers both) and the other operands have to be +SSE registers. + + vpshld xmm3,xmm1,[ebx] ; shift bytes from xmm1 + +"vpshab", "vpshaw", "vpshad" and "vpshaq" arithmetically shift bytes, words, +double words or quad words. These instructions follow the same rules as the +logical shifts described above. "vprotb", "vprotw", "vprotd" and "vprotq" +rotate bytes, word, double words or quad words. They follow the same rules as +shifts, but additionally allow third operand to be immediate value, in which +case the same amount of rotation is specified for all the elements in source. + + vprotb xmm0,[esi],3 ; rotate bytes to the left + + The MOVBE extension introduces just one new instruction, "movbe", which +swaps bytes in value from source before storing it in destination, so can +be used to load and store big endian values. It takes two operands, either +the destination or source should be a 16-bit, 32-bit or 64-bit memory (the +last one being only allowed in long mode), and the other operand should be +a general register of the same size. + The BMI extension, consisting of two subsets - BMI1 and BMI2, introduces +new instructions operating on general registers, which use the same encoding +as AVX instructions and so allow the extended syntax. All these instructions +use 32-bit operands, and in long mode they also allow the forms with 64-bit +operands. + "andn" calculates the bitwise AND of second source with the inverted bits +of first source and stores the result in destination. The destination and +the first source have to be general registers, the second source can be +general register or memory. + + andn edx,eax,[ebx] ; bit-multiply inverted eax with memory + + "bextr" extracts from the first source the sequence of bits using an index +and length specified by bit fields in the second source operand and stores +it into destination. The lowest 8 bits of second source specify the position +of bit sequence to extract and the next 8 bits of second source specify the +length of sequence. The first source can be a general register or memory, +the other two operands have to be general registers. + + bextr eax,[esi],ecx ; extract bit field from memory + + "blsi" extracts the lowest set bit from the source, setting all the other +bits in destination to zero. The destination must be a general register, +the source can be general register or memory. + + blsi rax,r11 ; isolate the lowest set bit + + "blsmsk" sets all the bits in the destination up to the lowest set bit in +the source, including this bit. "blsr" copies all the bits from the source to +destination except for the lowest set bit, which is replaced by zero. These +instructions follow the same rules for operands as "blsi". + "tzcnt" counts the number of trailing zero bits, that is the zero bits up to +the lowest set bit of source value. This instruction is analogous to "lzcnt" +and follows the same rules for operands, so it also has a 16-bit version, +unlike the other BMI instructions. + "bzhi" is BMI2 instruction, which copies the bits from first source to +destination, zeroing all the bits up from the position specified by second +source. It follows the same rules for operands as "bextr". + "pext" uses a mask in second source operand to select bits from first +operands and puts the selected bits as a continuous sequence into destination. +"pdep" performs the reverse operation - it takes sequence of bits from the +first source and puts them consecutively at the positions where the bits in +second source are set, setting all the other bits in destination to zero. +These BMI2 instructions follow the same rules for operands as "andn". + "mulx" is a BMI2 instruction which performs an unsigned multiplication of +value from EDX or RDX register (depending on the size of specified operands) +by the value from third operand, and stores the low half of result in the +second operand, and the high half of result in the first operand, and it does +it without affecting the flags. The third operand can be general register or +memory, and both the destination operands have to be general registers. + + mulx edx,eax,ecx ; multiply edx by ecx into edx:eax + + "shlx", "shrx" and "sarx" are BMI2 instructions, which perform logical or +arithmetical shifts of value from first source by the amount specified by +second source, and store the result in destination without affecting the +flags. The have the same rules for operands as "bzhi" instruction. + "rorx" is a BMI2 instruction which rotates right the value from source +operand by the constant amount specified in third operand and stores the +result in destination without affecting the flags. The destination operand +has to be general register, the source operand can be general register or +memory, and the third operand has to be an immediate value. + + rorx eax,edx,7 ; rotate without affecting flags + + The TBM is an extension designed by AMD to supplement the BMI set. The +"bextr" instruction is extended with a new form, in which second source is +a 32-bit immediate value. "blsic" is a new instruction which performs the +same operation as "blsi", but with the bits of result reversed. It uses the +same rules for operands as "blsi". "blsfill" is a new instruction, which takes +the value from source, sets all the bits below the lowest set bit and store +the result in destination, it also uses the same rules for operands as "blsi". + "blci", "blcic", "blcs", "blcmsk" and "blcfill" are instructions analogous +to "blsi", "blsic", "blsr", "blsmsk" and "blsfill" respectively, but they +perform the bit-inverted versions of the same operations. They follow the +same rules for operands as the instructions they reflect. + "tzmsk" finds the lowest set bit in value from source operand, sets all bits +below it to 1 and all the rest of bits to zero, then writes the result to +destination. "t1mskc" finds the least significant zero bit in the value from +source operand, sets the bits below it to zero and all the other bits to 1, +and writes the result to destination. These instructions have the same rules +for operands as "blsi". + + +2.1.24 Other extensions of instruction set + +There is a number of additional instruction set extensions recognized by flat +assembler, and the general syntax of the instructions introduced by those +extensions is provided here. For a detailed information on the operations +performed by them, check out the manuals from Intel (for the VMX, SMX, XSAVE, +RDRAND, FSGSBASE, INVPCID, HLE and RTM extensions) or AMD (for the SVM +extension). + The Virtual-Machine Extensions (VMX) provide a set of instructions for the +management of virtual machines. The "vmxon" instruction, which enters the VMX +operation, requires a single 64-bit memory operand, which should be a physical +address of memory region, which the logical processor may use to support VMX +operation. The "vmxoff" instruction, which leaves the VMX operation, has no +operands. The "vmlaunch" and "vmresume", which launch or resume the virtual +machines, and "vmcall", which allows guest software to call the VM monitor, +use no operands either. + The "vmptrld" loads the physical address of current Virtual Machine Control +Structure (VMCS) from its memory operand, "vmptrst" stores the pointer to +current VMCS into address specified by its memory operand, and "vmclear" sets +the launch state of the VMCS referenced by its memory operand to clear. These +three instruction all require single 64-bit memory operand. + The "vmread" reads from VCMS a field specified by the source operand and +stores it into the destination operand. The source operand should be a +general purpose register, and the destination operand can be a register of +memory. The "vmwrite" writes into a VMCS field specified by the destination +operand the value provided by source operand. The source operand can be a +general purpose register or memory, and the destination operand must be a +register. The size of operands for those instructions should be 64-bit when +in long mode, and 32-bit otherwise. + The "invept" and "invvpid" invalidate the translation lookaside buffers +(TLBs) and paging-structure caches, either derived from extended page tables +(EPT), or based on the virtual processor identifier (VPID). These instructions +require two operands, the first one being the general purpose register +specifying the type of invalidation, and the second one being a 128-bit +memory operand providing the invalidation descriptor. The first operand +should be a 64-bit register when in long mode, and 32-bit register otherwise. + The Safer Mode Extensions (SMX) provide the functionalities available +throught the "getsec" instruction. This instruction takes no operands, and +the function that is executed is determined by the contents of EAX register +upon executing this instruction. + The Secure Virtual Machine (SVM) is a variant of virtual machine extension +used by AMD. The "skinit" instruction securely reinitializes the processor +allowing the startup of trusted software, such as the virtual machine monitor +(VMM). This instruction takes a single operand, which must be EAX, and +provides a physical address of the secure loader block (SLB). + The "vmrun" instruction is used to start a guest virtual machine, +its only operand should be an accumulator register (AX, EAX or RAX, the +last one available only in long mode) providing the physical address of the +virtual machine control block (VMCB). The "vmsave" stores a subset of +processor state into VMCB specified by its operand, and "vmload" loads the +same subset of processor state from a specified VMCB. The same operand rules +as for the "vmrun" apply to those two instructions. + "vmmcall" allows the guest software to call the VMM. This instruction takes +no operands. + "stgi" set the global interrupt flag to 1, and "clgi" zeroes it. These +instructions take no operands. + "invlpga" invalidates the TLB mapping for a virtual page specified by the +first operand (which has to be accumulator register) and address space +identifier specified by the second operand (which must be ECX register). + The XSAVE set of instructions allows to save and restore processor state +components. "xsave" and "xsaveopt" store the components of processor state +defined by bit mask in EDX and EAX registers into area defined by memory +operand. "xrstor" restores from the area specified by memory operand the +components of processor state defined by mask in EDX and EAX. The "xsave64", +"xsaveopt64" and "xrstor64" are 64-bit versions of these instructions, allowed +only in long mode. + "xgetbv" read the contents of 64-bit XCR (extended control register) +specified in ECX register into EDX and EAX registers. "xsetbv" writes the +contents of EDX and EAX into the 64-bit XCR specified by ECX register. These +instructions have no operands. + The RDRAND extension introduces one new instruction, "rdrand", which loads +the hardware-generated random value into general register. It takes one +operand, which can be 16-bit, 32-bit or 64-bit register (with the last one +being allowed only in long mode). + The FSGSBASE extension adds long mode instructions that allow to read and +write the segment base registers for FS and GS segments. "rdfsbase" and +"rdgsbase" read the corresponding segment base registers into operand, while +"wrfsbase" and "wrgsbase" write the value of operand into those register. +All these instructions take one operand, which can be 32-bit or 64-bit general +register. + The INVPCID extension adds "invpcid" instruction, which invalidates mapping +in the TLBs and paging caches based on the invalidation type specified in +first operand and PCID invalidate descriptor specified in second operand. +The first operands should be 32-bit general register when not in long mode, +or 64-bit general register when in long mode. The second operand should be +128-bit memory location. + The HLE and RTM extensions provide set of instructions for the transactional +management. The "xacquire" and "xrelease" are new prefixes that can be used +with some of the instructions to start or end lock elision on the memory +address specified by prefixed instruction. The "xbegin" instruction starts +the transactional execution, its operand is the address a fallback routine +that gets executes in case of transaction abort, specified like the operand +for near jump instruction. "xend" marks the end of transcational execution +region, it takes no operands. "xabort" forces the transaction abort, it takes +an 8-bit immediate value as its only operand, this value is passed in the +highest bits of EAX to the fallback routine. "xtest" checks whether there is +transactional execution in progress, this instruction takes no operands. + + +2.2 Control directives + +This section describes the directives that control the assembly process, they +are processed during the assembly and may cause some blocks of instructions +to be assembled differently or not assembled at all. + + +2.2.1 Numerical constants + +The "=" directive allows to define the numerical constant. It should be +preceded by the name for the constant and followed by the numerical expression +providing the value. The value of such constants can be a number or an address, +but - unlike labels - the numerical constants are not allowed to hold the +register-based addresses. Besides this difference, in their basic variant +numerical constants behave very much like labels and you can even +forward-reference them (access their values before they actually get defined). + There is, however, a second variant of numerical constants, which is +recognized by assembler when you try to define the constant of name, under +which there already was a numerical constant defined. In such case assembler +treats that constant as an assembly-time variable and allows it to be assigned +with new value, but forbids forward-referencing it (for obvious reasons). Let's +see both the variant of numerical constants in one example: + + dd sum + x = 1 + x = x+2 + sum = x + +Here the "x" is an assembly-time variable, and every time it is accessed, the +value that was assigned to it the most recently is used. Thus if we tried to +access the "x" before it gets defined the first time, like if we wrote "dd x" +in place of the "dd sum" instruction, it would cause an error. And when it is +re-defined with the "x = x+2" directive, the previous value of "x" is used to +calculate the new one. So when the "sum" constant gets defined, the "x" has +value of 3, and this value is assigned to the "sum". Since this one is defined +only once in source, it is the standard numerical constant, and can be +forward-referenced. So the "dd sum" is assembled as "dd 3". To read more about +how the assembler is able to resolve this, see section 2.2.6. + The value of numerical constant can be preceded by size operator, which can +ensure that the value will fit in the range for the specified size, and can +affect also how some of the calculations inside the numerical expression are +performed. This example: + + c8 = byte -1 + c32 = dword -1 + +defines two different constants, the first one fits in 8 bits, the second one +fits in 32 bits. + When you need to define constant with the value of address, which may be +register-based (and thus you cannot employ numerical constant for this +purpose), you can use the extended syntax of "label" directive (already +described in section 1.2.3), like: + + label myaddr at ebp+4 + +which declares label placed at "ebp+4" address. However remember that labels, +unlike numerical constants, cannot become assembly-time variables. + + +2.2.2 Conditional assembly + +"if" directive causes some block of instructions to be assembled only under +certain condition. It should be followed by logical expression specifying the +condition, instructions in next lines will be assembled only when this +condition is met, otherwise they will be skipped. The optional "else if" +directive followed with logical expression specifying additional condition +begins the next block of instructions that will be assembled if previous +conditions were not met, and the additional condition is met. The optional +"else" directive begins the block of instructions that will be assembled if +all the conditions were not met. The "end if" directive ends the last block of +instructions. + You should note that "if" directive is processed at assembly stage and +therefore it doesn't affect any preprocessor directives, like the definitions +of symbolic constants and macroinstructions - when the assembler recognizes the +"if" directive, all the preprocessing has been already finished. + The logical expression consist of logical values and logical operators. The +logical operators are "~" for logical negation, "&" for logical and, "|" for +logical or. The negation has the highest priority. Logical value can be a +numerical expression, it will be false if it is equal to zero, otherwise it +will be true. Two numerical expression can be compared using one of the +following operators to make the logical value: "=" (equal), "<" (less), +">" (greater), "<=" (less or equal), ">=" (greater or equal), +"<>" (not equal). + The "used" operator followed by a symbol name, is the logical value that +checks whether the given symbol is used somewhere (it returns correct result +even if symbol is used only after this check). The "defined" operator can be +followed by any expression, usually just by a single symbol name; it checks +whether the given expression contains only symbols that are defined in the +source and accessible from the current position. + With "relativeto" operator it is possible to check whether values of two +expressions differ only by constant amount. The valid syntax is a numerical +expression followed by "relativeto" and then another expression (possibly +register-based). Labels that have no simple numerical value can be tested +this way to determine what kind of operations may be possible with them. + The following simple example uses the "count" constant that should be +defined somewhere in source: + + if count>0 + mov cx,count + rep movsb + end if + +These two assembly instructions will be assembled only if the "count" constant +is greater than 0. The next sample shows more complex conditional structure: + + if count & ~ count mod 4 + mov cx,count/4 + rep movsd + else if count>4 + mov cx,count/4 + rep movsd + mov cx,count mod 4 + rep movsb + else + mov cx,count + rep movsb + end if + +The first block of instructions gets assembled when the "count" is non zero and +divisible by four, if this condition is not met, the second logical expression, +which follows the "else if", is evaluated and if it's true, the second block +of instructions get assembled, otherwise the last block of instructions, which +follows the line containing only "else", is assembled. + There are also operators that allow comparison of values being any chains of +symbols. The "eq" compares whether two such values are exactly the same. +The "in" operator checks whether given value is a member of the list of values +following this operator, the list should be enclosed between "<" and ">" +characters, its members should be separated with commas. The symbols are +considered the same when they have the same meaning for the assembler - for +example "pword" and "fword" for assembler are the same and thus are not +distinguished by the above operators. In the same way "16 eq 10h" is the true +condition, however "16 eq 10+4" is not. + The "eqtype" operator checks whether the two compared values have the same +structure, and whether the structural elements are of the same type. The +distinguished types include numerical expressions, individual quoted strings, +floating point numbers, address expressions (the expressions enclosed in square +brackets or preceded by "ptr" operator), instruction mnemonics, registers, size +operators, jump type and code type operators. And each of the special +characters that act as a separators, like comma or colon, is the separate type +itself. For example, two values, each one consisting of register name followed +by comma and numerical expression, will be regarded as of the same type, no +matter what kind of register and how complicated numerical expression is used; +with exception for the quoted strings and floating point values, which are the +special kinds of numerical expressions and are treated as different types. Thus +"eax,16 eqtype fs,3+7" condition is true, but "eax,16 eqtype eax,1.6" is false. + + +2.2.3 Repeating blocks of instructions + +"times" directive repeats one instruction specified number of times. It +should be followed by numerical expression specifying number of repeats and +the instruction to repeat (optionally colon can be used to separate number and +instruction). When special symbol "%" is used inside the instruction, it is +equal to the number of current repeat. For example "times 5 db %" will define +five bytes with values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Recursive use of "times" directive is +also allowed, so "times 3 times % db %" will define six bytes with values +1, 1, 2, 1, 2, 3. + "repeat" directive repeats the whole block of instructions. It should be +followed by numerical expression specifying number of repeats. Instructions +to repeat are expected in next lines, ended with the "end repeat" directive, +for example: + + repeat 8 + mov byte [bx],% + inc bx + end repeat + +The generated code will store byte values from one to eight in the memory +addressed by BX register. + Number of repeats can be zero, in that case the instructions are not +assembled at all. + The "break" directive allows to stop repeating earlier and continue assembly +from the first line after the "end repeat". Combined with the "if" directive it +allows to stop repeating under some special condition, like: + + s = x/2 + repeat 100 + if x/s = s + break + end if + s = (s+x/s)/2 + end repeat + + The "while" directive repeats the block of instructions as long as the +condition specified by the logical expression following it is true. The block +of instructions to be repeated should end with the "end while" directive. +Before each repetition the logical expression is evaluated and when its value +is false, the assembly is continued starting from the first line after the +"end while". Also in this case the "%" symbol holds the number of current +repeat. The "break" directive can be used to stop this kind of loop in the same +way as with "repeat" directive. The previous sample can be rewritten to use the +"while" instead of "repeat" this way: + + s = x/2 + while x/s <> s + s = (s+x/s)/2 + if % = 100 + break + end if + end while + + The blocks defined with "if", "repeat" and "while" can be nested in any +order, however they should be closed in the same order in which they were +started. The "break" directive always stops processing the block that was +started last with either the "repeat" or "while" directive. + + +2.2.4 Addressing spaces + + "org" directive sets address at which the following code is expected to +appear in memory. It should be followed by numerical expression specifying +the address. This directive begins the new addressing space, the following +code itself is not moved in any way, but all the labels defined within it +and the value of "$" symbol are affected as if it was put at the given +address. However it's the responsibility of programmer to put the code at +correct address at run-time. + The "load" directive allows to define constant with a binary value loaded +from the already assembled code. This directive should be followed by the name +of the constant, then optionally size operator, then "from" operator and a +numerical expression specifying a valid address in current addressing space. +The size operator has unusual meaning in this case - it states how many bytes +(up to 8) have to be loaded to form the binary value of constant. If no size +operator is specified, one byte is loaded (thus value is in range from 0 to +255). The loaded data cannot exceed current offset. + The "store" directive can modify the already generated code by replacing +some of the previously generated data with the value defined by given +numerical expression, which follows. The expression can be preceded by the +optional size operator to specify how large value the expression defines, and +therefore how much bytes will be stored, if there is no size operator, the +size of one byte is assumed. Then the "at" operator and the numerical +expression defining the valid address in current addressing code space, at +which the given value have to be stored should follow. This is a directive for +advanced appliances and should be used carefully. + Both "load" and "store" directives are limited to operate on places in +current addressing space. The "$$" symbol is always equal to the base address +of current addressing space, and the "$" symbol is the address of current +position in that addressing space, therefore these two values define limits +of the area, where "load" and "store" can operate. + Combining the "load" and "store" directives allows to do things like encoding +some of the already generated code. For example to encode the whole code +generated in current addressing space you can use such block of directives: + + repeat $-$$ + load a byte from $$+%-1 + store byte a xor c at $$+%-1 + end repeat + +and each byte of code will be xored with the value defined by "c" constant. + "virtual" defines virtual data at specified address. This data will not be +included in the output file, but labels defined there can be used in other +parts of source. This directive can be followed by "at" operator and the +numerical expression specifying the address for virtual data, otherwise is +uses current address, the same as "virtual at $". Instructions defining data +are expected in next lines, ended with "end virtual" directive. The block of +virtual instructions itself is an independent addressing space, after it's +ended, the context of previous addressing space is restored. + The "virtual" directive can be used to create union of some variables, for +example: + + GDTR dp ? + virtual at GDTR + GDT_limit dw ? + GDT_address dd ? + end virtual + +It defines two labels for parts of the 48-bit variable at "GDTR" address. + It can be also used to define labels for some structures addressed by a +register, for example: + + virtual at bx + LDT_limit dw ? + LDT_address dd ? + end virtual + +With such definition instruction "mov ax,[LDT_limit]" will be assembled +to the same instruction as "mov ax,[bx]". + Declaring defined data values or instructions inside the virtual block would +also be useful, because the "load" directive can be used to load the values +from the virtually generated code into a constants. This directive should be +used after the code it loads but before the virtual block ends, because it can +only load the values from the same addressing space. For example: + + virtual at 0 + xor eax,eax + and edx,eax + load zeroq dword from 0 + end virtual + +The above piece of code will define the "zeroq" constant containing four bytes +of the machine code of the instructions defined inside the virtual block. +This method can be also used to load some binary value from external file. +For example this code: + + virtual at 0 + file 'a.txt':10h,1 + load char from 0 + end virtual + +loads the single byte from offset 10h in file "a.txt" into the "char" +constant. + Any of the "section" directives described in 2.4 also begins a new +addressing space. + + +2.2.5 Other directives + +"align" directive aligns code or data to the specified boundary. It should +be followed by a numerical expression specifying the number of bytes, to the +multiply of which the current address has to be aligned. The boundary value +has to be the power of two. + The "align" directive fills the bytes that had to be skipped to perform the +alignment with the "nop" instructions and at the same time marks this area as +uninitialized data, so if it is placed among other uninitialized data that +wouldn't take space in the output file, the alignment bytes will act the same +way. If you need to fill the alignment area with some other values, you can +combine "align" with "virtual" to get the size of alignment needed and then +create the alignment yourself, like: + + virtual + align 16 + a = $ - $$ + end virtual + db a dup 0 + +The "a" constant is defined to be the difference between address after +alignment and address of the "virtual" block (see previous section), so it is +equal to the size of needed alignment space. + "display" directive displays the message at the assembly time. It should +be followed by the quoted strings or byte values, separated with commas. It +can be used to display values of some constants, for example: + + bits = 16 + display 'Current offset is 0x' + repeat bits/4 + d = '0' + $ shr (bits-%*4) and 0Fh + if d > '9' + d = d + 'A'-'9'-1 + end if + display d + end repeat + display 13,10 + +This block of directives calculates the four hexadecimal digits of 16-bit +value and converts them into characters for displaying. Note that this will +not work if the adresses in current addressing space are relocatable (as it +might happen with PE or object output formats), since only absolute values can +be used this way. The absolute value may be obtained by calculating the +relative address, like "$-$$", or "rva $" in case of PE format. + The "err" directive immediately terminates the assembly process when it is +encountered by assembler. + The "assert" directive tests whether the logical expression that follows it +is true, and if not, it signalizes the error. + + +2.2.6 Multiple passes + +Because the assembler allows to reference some of the labels or constants +before they get actually defined, it has to predict the values of such labels +and if there is even a suspicion that prediction failed in at least one case, +it does one more pass, assembling the whole source, this time doing better +prediction based on the values the labels got in the previous pass. + The changing values of labels can cause some instructions to have encodings +of different length, and this can cause the change in values of labels again. +And since the labels and constants can also be used inside the expressions that +affect the behavior of control directives, the whole block of source can be +processed completely differently during the new pass. Thus the assembler does +more and more passes, each time trying to do better predictions to approach +the final solution, when all the values get predicted correctly. It uses +various method for predicting the values, which has been chosen to allow +finding in a few passes the solution of possibly smallest length for the most +of the programs. + Some of the errors, like the values not fitting in required boundaries, are +not signaled during those intermediate passes, since it may happen that when +some of the values are predicted better, these errors will disappear. However +if assembler meets some illegal syntax construction or unknown instruction, it +always stops immediately. Also defining some label more than once causes such +error, because it makes the predictions groundless. + Only the messages created with the "display" directive during the last +performed pass get actually displayed. In case when the assembly has been +stopped due to an error, these messages may reflect the predicted values that +are not yet resolved correctly. + The solution may sometimes not exist and in such cases the assembler will +never manage to make correct predictions - for this reason there is a limit for +a number of passes, and when assembler reaches this limit, it stops and +displays the message that it is not able to generate the correct output. +Consider the following example: + + if ~ defined alpha + alpha: + end if + +The "defined" operator gives the true value when the expression following it +could be calculated in this place, what in this case means that the "alpha" +label is defined somewhere. But the above block causes this label to be defined +only when the value given by "defined" operator is false, what leads to an +antynomy and makes it impossible to resolve such code. When processing the "if" +directive assembler has to predict whether the "alpha" label will be defined +somewhere (it wouldn't have to predict only if the label was already defined +earlier in this pass), and whatever the prediction is, the opposite always +happens. Thus the assembly will fail, unless the "alpha" label is defined +somewhere in source preceding the above block of instructions - in such case, +as it was already noted, the prediction is not needed and the block will just +get skipped. + The above sample might have been written as a try to define the label only +when it was not yet defined. It fails, because the "defined" operator does +check whether the label is defined anywhere, and this includes the definition +inside this conditionally processed block. However adding some additional +condition may make it possible to get it resolved: + + if ~ defined alpha | defined @f + alpha: + @@: + end if + +The "@f" is always the same label as the nearest "@@" symbol in the source +following it, so the above sample would mean the same if any unique name was +used instead of the anonymous label. When "alpha" is not defined in any other +place in source, the only possible solution is when this block gets defined, +and this time this doesn't lead to the antynomy, because of the anonymous +label which makes this block self-establishing. To better understand this, +look at the blocks that has nothing more than this self-establishing: + + if defined @f + @@: + end if + +This is an example of source that may have more than one solution, as both +cases when this block gets processed or not are equally correct. Which one of +those two solutions we get depends on the algorithm on the assembler, in case +of flat assembler - on the algorithm of predictions. Back to the previous +sample, when "alpha" is not defined anywhere else, the condition for "if" block +cannot be false, so we are left with only one possible solution, and we can +hope the assembler will arrive at it. On the other hand, when "alpha" is +defined in some other place, we've got two possible solutions again, but one of +them causes "alpha" to be defined twice, and such an error causes assembler to +abort the assembly immediately, as this is the kind of error that deeply +disturbs the process of resolving. So we can get such source either correctly +resolved or causing an error, and what we get may depend on the internal +choices made by the assembler. + However there are some facts about such choices that are certain. When +assembler has to check whether the given symbol is defined and it was already +defined in the current pass, no prediction is needed - it was already noted +above. And when the given symbol has been defined never before, including all +the already finished passes, the assembler predicts it to be not defined. +Knowing this, we can expect that the simple self-establishing block shown +above will not be assembled at all and that the previous sample will resolve +correctly when "alpha" is defined somewhere before our conditional block, +while it will itself define "alpha" when it's not already defined earlier, thus +potentially causing the error because of double definition if the "alpha" is +also defined somewhere later. + The "used" operator may be expected to behave in a similar manner in +analogous cases, however any other kinds of predictions my not be so simple and +you should never rely on them this way. + The "err" directive, usually used to stop the assembly when some condition is +met, stops the assembly immediately, regardless of whether the current pass +is final or intermediate. So even when the condition that caused this directive +to be interpreted is mispredicted and temporary, and would eventually disappear +in the later passes, the assembly is stopped anyway. + The "assert" directive signalizes the error only if its expression is false +after all the symbols have been resolved. You can use "assert 0" in place of +"err" when you do not want to have assembly stopped during the intermediate +passes. + + +2.3 Preprocessor directives + +All preprocessor directives are processed before the main assembly process, +and therefore are not affected by the control directives. At this time also +all comments are stripped out. + + +2.3.1 Including source files + +"include" directive includes the specified source file at the position where +it is used. It should be followed by the quoted name of file that should be +included, for example: + + include 'macros.inc' + +The whole included file is preprocessed before preprocessing the lines next +to the line containing the "include" directive. There are no limits to the +number of included files as long as they fit in memory. + The quoted path can contain environment variables enclosed within "%" +characters, they will be replaced with their values inside the path, both the +"\" and "/" characters are allowed as a path separators. The file is first +searched for in the directory containing file which included it and when it is +not found there, the search is continued in the directories specified in the +environment variable called INCLUDE (the multiple paths separated with +semicolons can be defined there, they will be searched in the same order as +specified). If file was not found in any of these places, preprocessor looks +for it in the directory containing the main source file (the one specified in +command line). These rules concern also paths given with the "file" directive. + + +2.3.2 Symbolic constants + +The symbolic constants are different from the numerical constants, before the +assembly process they are replaced with their values everywhere in source +lines after their definitions, and anything can become their values. + The definition of symbolic constant consists of name of the constant +followed by the "equ" directive. Everything that follows this directive will +become the value of constant. If the value of symbolic constant contains +other symbolic constants, they are replaced with their values before assigning +this value to the new constant. For example: + + d equ dword + NULL equ d 0 + d equ edx + +After these three definitions the value of "NULL" constant is "dword 0" and +the value of "d" is "edx". So, for example, "push NULL" will be assembled as +"push dword 0" and "push d" will be assembled as "push edx". And if then the +following line was put: + + d equ d,eax + +the "d" constant would get the new value of "edx,eax". This way the growing +lists of symbols can be defined. + "restore" directive allows to get back previous value of redefined symbolic +constant. It should be followed by one more names of symbolic constants, +separated with commas. So "restore d" after the above definitions will give +"d" constant back the value "edx", the second one will restore it to value +"dword", and one more will revert "d" to original meaning as if no such +constant was defined. If there was no constant defined of given name, +"restore" will not cause an error, it will be just ignored. + Symbolic constant can be used to adjust the syntax of assembler to personal +preferences. For example the following set of definitions provides the handy +shortcuts for all the size operators: + + b equ byte + w equ word + d equ dword + p equ pword + f equ fword + q equ qword + t equ tword + x equ dqword + y equ qqword + + Because symbolic constant may also have an empty value, it can be used to +allow the syntax with "offset" word before any address value: + + offset equ + +After this definition "mov ax,offset char" will be valid construction for +copying the offset of "char" variable into "ax" register, because "offset" is +replaced with an empty value, and therefore ignored. + The "define" directive followed by the name of constant and then the value, +is the alternative way of defining symbolic constant. The only difference +between "define" and "equ" is that "define" assigns the value as it is, it does +not replace the symbolic constants with their values inside it. + Symbolic constants can also be defined with the "fix" directive, which has +the same syntax as "equ", but defines constants of high priority - they are +replaced with their symbolic values even before processing the preprocessor +directives and macroinstructions, the only exception is "fix" directive +itself, which has the highest possible priority, so it allows redefinition of +constants defined this way. + The "fix" directive can be used for syntax adjustments related to directives +of preprocessor, what cannot be done with "equ" directive. For example: + + incl fix include + +defines a short name for "include" directive, while the similar definition done +with "equ" directive wouldn't give such result, as standard symbolic constants +are replaced with their values after searching the line for preprocessor +directives. + + +2.3.3 Macroinstructions + +"macro" directive allows you to define your own complex instructions, called +macroinstructions, using which can greatly simplify the process of +programming. In its simplest form it's similar to symbolic constant +definition. For example the following definition defines a shortcut for the +"test al,0xFF" instruction: + + macro tst {test al,0xFF} + +After the "macro" directive there is a name of macroinstruction and then its +contents enclosed between the "{" and "}" characters. You can use "tst" +instruction anywhere after this definition and it will be assembled as +"test al,0xFF". Defining symbolic constant "tst" of that value would give the +similar result, but the difference is that the name of macroinstruction is +recognized only as an instruction mnemonic. Also, macroinstructions are +replaced with corresponding code even before the symbolic constants are +replaced with their values. So if you define macroinstruction and symbolic +constant of the same name, and use this name as an instruction mnemonic, it +will be replaced with the contents of macroinstruction, but it will be +replaced with value if symbolic constant if used somewhere inside the +operands. + The definition of macroinstruction can consist of many lines, because +"{" and "}" characters don't have to be in the same line as "macro" directive. +For example: + + macro stos0 + { + xor al,al + stosb + } + +The macroinstruction "stos0" will be replaced with these two assembly +instructions anywhere it's used. + Like instructions which needs some number of operands, the macroinstruction +can be defined to need some number of arguments separated with commas. The +names of needed argument should follow the name of macroinstruction in the +line of "macro" directive and should be separated with commas if there is more +than one. Anywhere one of these names occurs in the contents of +macroinstruction, it will be replaced with corresponding value, provided when +the macroinstruction is used. Here is an example of a macroinstruction that +will do data alignment for binary output format: + + macro align value { rb (value-1)-($+value-1) mod value } + +When the "align 4" instruction is found after this macroinstruction is +defined, it will be replaced with contents of this macroinstruction, and the +"value" will there become 4, so the result will be "rb (4-1)-($+4-1) mod 4". + If a macroinstruction is defined that uses an instruction with the same name +inside its definition, the previous meaning of this name is used. Useful +redefinition of macroinstructions can be done in that way, for example: + + macro mov op1,op2 + { + if op1 in & op2 in + push op2 + pop op1 + else + mov op1,op2 + end if + } + +This macroinstruction extends the syntax of "mov" instruction, allowing both +operands to be segment registers. For example "mov ds,es" will be assembled as +"push es" and "pop ds". In all other cases the standard "mov" instruction will +be used. The syntax of this "mov" can be extended further by defining next +macroinstruction of that name, which will use the previous macroinstruction: + + macro mov op1,op2,op3 + { + if op3 eq + mov op1,op2 + else + mov op1,op2 + mov op2,op3 + end if + } + +It allows "mov" instruction to have three operands, but it can still have two +operands only, because when macroinstruction is given less arguments than it +needs, the rest of arguments will have empty values. When three operands are +given, this macroinstruction will become two macroinstructions of the previous +definition, so "mov es,ds,dx" will be assembled as "push ds", "pop es" and +"mov ds,dx". + By placing the "*" after the name of argument you can mark the argument as +required - preprocessor will not allow it to have an empty value. For example +the above macroinstruction could be declared as "macro mov op1*,op2*,op3" to +make sure that first two arguments will always have to be given some non empty +values. + Alternatively, you can provide the default value for argument, by placing +the "=" followed by value after the name of argument. Then if the argument +has an empty value provided, the default value will be used instead. + When it's needed to provide macroinstruction with argument that contains +some commas, such argument should be enclosed between "<" and ">" characters. +If it contains more than one "<" character, the same number of ">" should be +used to tell that the value of argument ends. + "purge" directive allows removing the last definition of specified +macroinstruction. It should be followed by one or more names of +macroinstructions, separated with commas. If such macroinstruction has not +been defined, you will not get any error. For example after having the syntax +of "mov" extended with the macroinstructions defined above, you can disable +syntax with three operands back by using "purge mov" directive. Next +"purge mov" will disable also syntax for two operands being segment registers, +and all the next such directives will do nothing. + If after the "macro" directive you enclose some group of arguments' names in +square brackets, it will allow giving more values for this group of arguments +when using that macroinstruction. Any more argument given after the last +argument of such group will begin the new group and will become the first +argument of it. That's why after closing the square bracket no more argument +names can follow. The contents of macroinstruction will be processed for each +such group of arguments separately. The simplest example is to enclose one +argument name in square brackets: + + macro stoschar [char] + { + mov al,char + stosb + } + +This macroinstruction accepts unlimited number of arguments, and each one +will be processed into these two instructions separately. For example +"stoschar 1,2,3" will be assembled as the following instructions: + + mov al,1 + stosb + mov al,2 + stosb + mov al,3 + stosb + + There are some special directives available only inside the definitions of +macroinstructions. "local" directive defines local names, which will be +replaced with unique values each time the macroinstruction is used. It should +be followed by names separated with commas. If the name given as parameter to +"local" directive begins with a dot or two dots, the unique labels generated +by each evaluation of macroinstruction will have the same properties. +This directive is usually needed for the constants or labels that +macroinstruction defines and uses internally. For example: + + macro movstr + { + local move + move: + lodsb + stosb + test al,al + jnz move + } + +Each time this macroinstruction is used, "move" will become other unique name +in its instructions, so you will not get an error you normally get when some +label is defined more than once. + "forward", "reverse" and "common" directives divide macroinstruction into +blocks, each one processed after the processing of previous is finished. They +differ in behavior only if macroinstruction allows multiple groups of +arguments. Block of instructions that follows "forward" directive is processed +for each group of arguments, from first to last - exactly like the default +block (not preceded by any of these directives). Block that follows "reverse" +directive is processed for each group of argument in reverse order - from last +to first. Block that follows "common" directive is processed only once, +commonly for all groups of arguments. Local name defined in one of the blocks +is available in all the following blocks when processing the same group of +arguments as when it was defined, and when it is defined in common block it is +available in all the following blocks not depending on which group of +arguments is processed. + Here is an example of macroinstruction that will create the table of +addresses to strings followed by these strings: + + macro strtbl name,[string] + { + common + label name dword + forward + local label + dd label + forward + label db string,0 + } + +First argument given to this macroinstruction will become the label for table +of addresses, next arguments should be the strings. First block is processed +only once and defines the label, second block for each string declares its +local name and defines the table entry holding the address to that string. +Third block defines the data of each string with the corresponding label. + The directive starting the block in macroinstruction can be followed by the +first instruction of this block in the same line, like in the following +example: + + macro stdcall proc,[arg] + { + reverse push arg + common call proc + } + +This macroinstruction can be used for calling the procedures using STDCALL +convention, which has all the arguments pushed on stack in the reverse order. +For example "stdcall foo,1,2,3" will be assembled as: + + push 3 + push 2 + push 1 + call foo + + If some name inside macroinstruction has multiple values (it is either one +of the arguments enclosed in square brackets or local name defined in the +block following "forward" or "reverse" directive) and is used in block +following the "common" directive, it will be replaced with all of its values, +separated with commas. For example the following macroinstruction will pass +all of the additional arguments to the previously defined "stdcall" +macroinstruction: + + macro invoke proc,[arg] + { common stdcall [proc],arg } + +It can be used to call indirectly (by the pointer stored in memory) the +procedure using STDCALL convention. + Inside macroinstruction also special operator "#" can be used. This +operator causes two names to be concatenated into one name. It can be useful, +because it's done after the arguments and local names are replaced with their +values. The following macroinstruction will generate the conditional jump +according to the "cond" argument: + + macro jif op1,cond,op2,label + { + cmp op1,op2 + j#cond label + } + +For example "jif ax,ae,10h,exit" will be assembled as "cmp ax,10h" and +"jae exit" instructions. + The "#" operator can be also used to concatenate two quoted strings into one. +Also conversion of name into a quoted string is possible, with the "`" operator, +which likewise can be used inside the macroinstruction. It converts the name +that follows it into a quoted string - but note, that when it is followed by +a macro argument which is being replaced with value containing more than one +symbol, only the first of them will be converted, as the "`" operator converts +only one symbol that immediately follows it. Here's an example of utilizing +those two features: + + macro label name + { + label name + if ~ used name + display `name # " is defined but not used.",13,10 + end if + } + +When label defined with such macro is not used in the source, macro will warn +you with the message, informing to which label it applies. + To make macroinstruction behaving differently when some of the arguments are +of some special type, for example a quoted strings, you can use "eqtype" +comparison operator. Here's an example of utilizing it to distinguish a +quoted string from an other argument: + + macro message arg + { + if arg eqtype "" + local str + jmp @f + str db arg,0Dh,0Ah,24h + @@: + mov dx,str + else + mov dx,arg + end if + mov ah,9 + int 21h + } + +The above macro is designed for displaying messages in DOS programs. When the +argument of this macro is some number, label, or variable, the string from +that address is displayed, but when the argument is a quoted string, the +created code will display that string followed by the carriage return and +line feed. + It is also possible to put a declaration of macroinstruction inside another +macroinstruction, so one macro can define another, but there is a problem +with such definitions caused by the fact, that "}" character cannot occur +inside the macroinstruction, as it always means the end of definition. To +overcome this problem, the escaping of symbols inside macroinstruction can be +used. This is done by placing one or more backslashes in front of any other +symbol (even the special character). Preprocessor sees such sequence as a +single symbol, but each time it meets such symbol during the macroinstruction +processing, it cuts the backslash character from the front of it. For example +"\{" is treated as single symbol, but during processing of the macroinstruction +it becomes the "{" symbol. This allows to put one definition of +macroinstruction inside another: + + macro ext instr + { + macro instr op1,op2,op3 + \{ + if op3 eq + instr op1,op2 + else + instr op1,op2 + instr op2,op3 + end if + \} + } + + ext add + ext sub + +The macro "ext" is defined correctly, but when it is used, the "\{" and "\}" +become the "{" and "}" symbols. So when the "ext add" is processed, the +contents of macro becomes valid definition of a macroinstruction and this way +the "add" macro becomes defined. In the same way "ext sub" defines the "sub" +macro. The use of "\{" symbol wasn't really necessary here, but is done this +way to make the definition more clear. + If some directives specific to macroinstructions, like "local" or "common" +are needed inside some macro embedded this way, they can be escaped in the same +way. Escaping the symbol with more than one backslash is also allowed, which +allows multiple levels of nesting the macroinstruction definitions. + The another technique for defining one macroinstruction by another is to +use the "fix" directive, which becomes useful when some macroinstruction only +begins the definition of another one, without closing it. For example: + + macro tmacro [params] + { + common macro params { + } + + MACRO fix tmacro + ENDM fix } + +defines an alternative syntax for defining macroinstructions, which looks like: + + MACRO stoschar char + mov al,char + stosb + ENDM + +Note that symbol that has such customized definition must be defined with "fix" +directive, because only the prioritized symbolic constants are processed before +the preprocessor looks for the "}" character while defining the macro. This +might be a problem if one needed to perform some additional tasks one the end +of such definition, but there is one more feature which helps in such cases. +Namely it is possible to put any directive, instruction or macroinstruction +just after the "}" character that ends the macroinstruction and it will be +processed in the same way as if it was put in the next line. + + +2.3.4 Structures + +"struc" directive is a special variant of "macro" directive that is used to +define data structures. Macroinstruction defined using the "struc" directive +must be preceded by a label (like the data definition directive) when it's +used. This label will be also attached at the beginning of every name starting +with dot in the contents of macroinstruction. The macroinstruction defined +using the "struc" directive can have the same name as some other +macroinstruction defined using the "macro" directive, structure +macroinstruction will not prevent the standard macroinstruction from being +processed when there is no label before it and vice versa. All the rules and +features concerning standard macroinstructions apply to structure +macroinstructions. + Here is the sample of structure macroinstruction: + + struc point x,y + { + .x dw x + .y dw y + } + +For example "my point 7,11" will define structure labeled "my", consisting of +two variables: "my.x" with value 7 and "my.y" with value 11. + If somewhere inside the definition of structure the name consisting of a +single dot it found, it is replaced by the name of the label for the given +instance of structure and this label will not be defined automatically in +such case, allowing to completely customize the definition. The following +example utilizes this feature to extend the data definition directive "db" +with ability to calculate the size of defined data: + + struc db [data] + { + common + . db data + .size = $ - . + } + +With such definition "msg db 'Hello!',13,10" will define also "msg.size" +constant, equal to the size of defined data in bytes. + Defining data structures addressed by registers or absolute values should be +done using the "virtual" directive with structure macroinstruction +(see 2.2.4). + "restruc" directive removes the last definition of the structure, just like +"purge" does with macroinstructions and "restore" with symbolic constants. +It also has the same syntax - should be followed by one or more names of +structure macroinstructions, separated with commas. + + +2.3.5 Repeating macroinstructions + +The "rept" directive is a special kind of macroinstruction, which makes given +amount of duplicates of the block enclosed with braces. The basic syntax is +"rept" directive followed by number and then block of source enclosed between +the "{" and "}" characters. The simplest example: + + rept 5 { in al,dx } + +will make five duplicates of the "in al,dx" line. The block of instructions +is defined in the same way as for the standard macroinstruction and any +special operators and directives which can be used only inside +macroinstructions are also allowed here. When the given count is zero, the +block is simply skipped, as if you defined macroinstruction but never used +it. The number of repetitions can be followed by the name of counter symbol, +which will get replaced symbolically with the number of duplicate currently +generated. So this: + + rept 3 counter + { + byte#counter db counter + } + +will generate lines: + + byte1 db 1 + byte2 db 2 + byte3 db 3 + +The repetition mechanism applied to "rept" blocks is the same as the one used +to process multiple groups of arguments for macroinstructions, so directives +like "forward", "common" and "reverse" can be used in their usual meaning. +Thus such macroinstruction: + + rept 7 num { reverse display `num } + +will display digits from 7 to 1 as text. The "local" directive behaves in the +same way as inside macroinstruction with multiple groups of arguments, so: + + rept 21 + { + local label + label: loop label + } + +will generate unique label for each duplicate. + The counter symbol by default counts from 1, but you can declare different +base value by placing the number preceded by colon immediately after the name +of counter. For example: + + rept 8 n:0 { pxor xmm#n,xmm#n } + +will generate code which will clear the contents of eight SSE registers. +You can define multiple counters separated with commas, and each one can have +different base. + The number of repetitions and the base values for counters can be specified +using the numerical expressions with operator rules identical as in the case +of assembler. However each value used in such expression must either be a +directly specified number, or a symbolic constant with value also being an +expression that can be calculated by preprocessor (in such case the value +of expression associated with symbolic constant is calculated first, and then +substituted into the outer expression in place of that constant). If you need +repetitions based on values that can only be calculated at assembly time, use +one of the code repeating directives that are processed by assembler, see +section 2.2.3. + The "irp" directive iterates the single argument through the given list of +parameters. The syntax is "irp" followed by the argument name, then the comma +and then the list of parameters. The parameters are specified in the same +way like in the invocation of standard macroinstruction, so they have to be +separated with commas and each one can be enclosed with the "<" and ">" +characters. Also the name of argument may be followed by "*" to mark that it +cannot get an empty value. Such block: + + irp value, 2,3,5 + { db value } + +will generate lines: + + db 2 + db 3 + db 5 + +The "irps" directive iterates through the given list of symbols, it should +be followed by the argument name, then the comma and then the sequence of any +symbols. Each symbol in this sequence, no matter whether it is the name +symbol, symbol character or quoted string, becomes an argument value for one +iteration. If there are no symbols following the comma, no iteration is done +at all. This example: + + irps reg, al bx ecx + { xor reg,reg } + +will generate lines: + + xor al,al + xor bx,bx + xor ecx,ecx + +The blocks defined by the "irp" and "irps" directives are also processed in +the same way as any macroinstructions, so operators and directives specific +to macroinstructions may be freely used also in this case. + + +2.3.6 Conditional preprocessing + +"match" directive causes some block of source to be preprocessed and passed +to assembler only when the given sequence of symbols matches the specified +pattern. The pattern comes first, ended with comma, then the symbols that have +to be matched with the pattern, and finally the block of source, enclosed +within braces as macroinstruction. + There are the few rules for building the expression for matching, first is +that any of symbol characters and any quoted string should be matched exactly +as is. In this example: + + match +,+ { include 'first.inc' } + match +,- { include 'second.inc' } + +the first file will get included, since "+" after comma matches the "+" in +pattern, and the second file will not be included, since there is no match. + To match any other symbol literally, it has to be preceded by "=" character +in the pattern. Also to match the "=" character itself, or the comma, the +"==" and "=," constructions have to be used. For example the "=a==" pattern +will match the "a=" sequence. + If some name symbol is placed in the pattern, it matches any sequence +consisting of at least one symbol and then this name is replaced with the +matched sequence everywhere inside the following block, analogously to the +parameters of macroinstruction. For instance: + + match a-b, 0-7 + { dw a,b-a } + +will generate the "dw 0,7-0" instruction. Each name is always matched with +as few symbols as possible, leaving the rest for the following ones, so in +this case: + + match a b, 1+2+3 { db a } + +the "a" name will match the "1" symbol, leaving the "+2+3" sequence to be +matched with "b". But in this case: + + match a b, 1 { db a } + +there will be nothing left for "b" to match, so the block will not get +processed at all. + The block of source defined by match is processed in the same way as any +macroinstruction, so any operators specific to macroinstructions can be used +also in this case. + What makes "match" directive more useful is the fact, that it replaces the +symbolic constants with their values in the matched sequence of symbols (that +is everywhere after comma up to the beginning of the source block) before +performing the match. Thanks to this it can be used for example to process +some block of source under the condition that some symbolic constant has the +given value, like: + + match =TRUE, DEBUG { include 'debug.inc' } + +which will include the file only when the symbolic constant "DEBUG" was +defined with value "TRUE". + + +2.3.7 Order of processing + +When combining various features of the preprocessor, it's important to know +the order in which they are processed. As it was already noted, the highest +priority has the "fix" directive and the replacements defined with it. This +is done completely before doing any other preprocessing, therefore this +piece of source: + + V fix { + macro empty + V + V fix } + V + +becomes a valid definition of an empty macroinstruction. It can be interpreted +that the "fix" directive and prioritized symbolic constants are processed in +a separate stage, and all other preprocessing is done after on the resulting +source. + The standard preprocessing that comes after, on each line begins with +recognition of the first symbol. It starts with checking for the preprocessor +directives, and when none of them is detected, preprocessor checks whether the +first symbol is macroinstruction. If no macroinstruction is found, it moves +to the second symbol of line, and again begins with checking for directives, +which in this case is only the "equ" directive, as this is the only one that +occurs as the second symbol in line. If there is no directive, the second +symbol is checked for the case of structure macroinstruction and when none +of those checks gives the positive result, the symbolic constants are replaced +with their values and such line is passed to the assembler. + To see it on the example, assume that there is defined the macroinstruction +called "foo" and the structure macroinstruction called "bar". Those lines: + + foo equ + foo bar + +would be then both interpreted as invocations of macroinstruction "foo", since +the meaning of the first symbol overrides the meaning of second one. + When the macroinstruction generates the new lines from its definition block, +in every line it first scans for macroinstruction directives, and interpretes +them accordingly. All the other content in the definition block is used to +brew the new lines, replacing the macroinstruction parameters with their values +and then processing the symbol escaping and "#" and "`" operators. The +conversion operator has the higher priority than concatenation and if any of +them operates on the escaped symbol, the escaping is cancelled before finishing +the operation. After this is completed, the newly generated line goes through +the standard preprocessing, as described above. + Though the symbolic constants are usually only replaced in the lines, where +no preprocessor directives nor macroinstructions has been found, there are some +special cases where those replacements are performed in the parts of lines +containing directives. First one is the definition of symbolic constant, where +the replacements are done everywhere after the "equ" keyword and the resulting +value is then assigned to the new constant (see 2.3.2). The second such case +is the "match" directive, where the replacements are done in the symbols +following comma before matching them with pattern. These features can be used +for example to maintain the lists, like this set of definitions: + + list equ + + macro append item + { + match any, list \{ list equ list,item \} + match , list \{ list equ item \} + } + +The "list" constant is here initialized with empty value, and the "append" +macroinstruction can be used to add the new items into this list, separating +them with commas. The first match in this macroinstruction occurs only when +the value of list is not empty (see 2.3.6), in such case the new value for the +list is the previous one with the comma and the new item appended at the end. +The second match happens only when the list is still empty, and in such case +the list is defined to contain just the new item. So starting with the empty +list, the "append 1" would define "list equ 1" and the "append 2" following it +would define "list equ 1,2". One might then need to use this list as the +parameters to some macroinstruction. But it cannot be done directly - if "foo" +is the macroinstruction, then "foo list" would just pass the "list" symbol +as a parameter to macro, since symbolic constants are not unrolled at this +stage. For this purpose again "match" directive comes in handy: + + match params, list { foo params } + +The value of "list", if it's not empty, matches the "params" keyword, which is +then replaced with matched value when generating the new lines defined by the +block enclosed with braces. So if the "list" had value "1,2", the above line +would generate the line containing "foo 1,2", which would then go through the +standard preprocessing. + The other special case is in the parameters of "rept" directive. The amount +of repetitions and the base value for counter can be specified using +numerical expressions, and if there is a symbolic constant with non-numerical +name used in such an expression, preprocessor tries to evaluate its value as +a numerical expression and if succeeds, it replaces the symbolic constant with +the result of that calculation and continues to evaluate the primary +expression. If the expression inside that symbolic constants also contains +some symbolic constants, preprocessor will try to calculate all the needed +values recursively. + This allows to perform some calculations at the time of preprocessing, as +long as all the values used are the numbers known at the preprocessing stage. +A single repetition with "rept" can be used for the sole purpose of +calculating some value, like in this example: + + define a b+4 + define b 3 + rept 1 result:a*b+2 { define c result } + +To compute the base value for "result" counter, preprocessor replaces the "b" +with its value and recursively calculates the value of "a", obtaining 7 as +the result, then it calculates the main expression with the result being 23. +The "c" then gets defined with the first value of counter (because the block +is processed just one time), which is the result of the computation, so the +value of "c" is simple "23" symbol. Note that if "b" is later redefined with +some other numerical value, the next time and expression containing "a" is +calculated, the value of "a" will reflect the new value of "b", because the +symbolic constant contains just the text of the expression. + There is one more special case - when preprocessor goes to checking the +second symbol in the line and it happens to be the colon character (what is +then interpreted by assembler as definition of a label), it stops in this +place and finishes the preprocessing of the first symbol (so if it's the +symbolic constant it gets unrolled) and if it still appears to be the label, +it performs the standard preprocessing starting from the place after the +label. This allows to place preprocessor directives and macroinstructions +after the labels, analogously to the instructions and directives processed +by assembler, like: + + start: include 'start.inc' + +However if the label becomes broken during preprocessing (for example when +it is the symbolic constant with empty value), only replacing of the symbolic +constants is continued for the rest of line. + It should be remembered, that the jobs performed by preprocessor are the +preliminary operations on the texts symbols, that are done in a simple +single pass before the main process of assembly. The text that is the +result of preprocessing is passed to assembler, and it then does its +multiple passes on it. Thus the control directives, which are recognized and +processed only by the assembler - as they are dependent on the numerical +values that may even vary between passes - are not recognized in any way by +the preprocessor and have no effect on the preprocessing. Consider this +example source: + + if 0 + a = 1 + b equ 2 + end if + dd b + +When it is preprocessed, they only directive that is recognized by the +preprocessor is the "equ", which defines symbolic constant "b", so later +in the source the "b" symbol is replaced with the value "2". Except for this +replacement, the other lines are passes unchanged to the assembler. So +after preprocessing the above source becomes: + + if 0 + a = 1 + end if + dd 2 + +Now when assembler processes it, the condition for the "if" is false, and +the "a" constant doesn't get defined. However symbolic constant "b" was +processed normally, even though its definition was put just next to the one +of "a". So because of the possible confusion you should be very careful +every time when mixing the features of preprocessor and assembler - in such +cases it is important to realize what the source will become after the +preprocessing, and thus what the assembler will see and do its multiple passes +on. + + +2.4 Formatter directives + +These directives are actually also a kind of control directives, with the +purpose of controlling the format of generated code. + "format" directive followed by the format identifier allows to select the +output format. This directive should be put at the beginning of the source. +Default output format is a flat binary file, it can also be selected by using +"format binary" directive. This directive can be followed by the "as" keyword +and the quoted string specifying the default file extension for the output +file. Unless the output file name was specified from the command line, +assembler will use this extension when generating the output file. + "use16" and "use32" directives force the assembler to generate 16-bit or +32-bit code, omitting the default setting for selected output format. "use64" +enables generating the code for the long mode of x86-64 processors. + Below are described different output formats with the directives specific to +these formats. + + +2.4.1 MZ executable + +To select the MZ output format, use "format MZ" directive. The default code +setting for this format is 16-bit. + "segment" directive defines a new segment, it should be followed by label, +which value will be the number of defined segment, optionally "use16" or +"use32" word can follow to specify whether code in this segment should be +16-bit or 32-bit. The origin of segment is aligned to paragraph (16 bytes). +All the labels defined then will have values relative to the beginning of this +segment. + "entry" directive sets the entry point for MZ executable, it should be +followed by the far address (name of segment, colon and the offset inside +segment) of desired entry point. + "stack" directive sets up the stack for MZ executable. It can be followed by +numerical expression specifying the size of stack to be created automatically +or by the far address of initial stack frame when you want to set up the stack +manually. When no stack is defined, the stack of default size 4096 bytes will +be created. + "heap" directive should be followed by a 16-bit value defining maximum size +of additional heap in paragraphs (this is heap in addition to stack and +undefined data). Use "heap 0" to always allocate only memory program really +needs. Default size of heap is 65535. + + +2.4.2 Portable Executable + +To select the Portable Executable output format, use "format PE" directive, it +can be followed by additional format settings: first the target subsystem +setting, which can be "console" or "GUI" for Windows applications, "native" +for Windows drivers, "EFI", "EFIboot" or "EFIruntime" for the UEFI, it may be +followed by the minimum version of system that the executable is targeted to +(specified in form of floating-point value). Optional "DLL" and "WDM" keywords +mark the output file as a dynamic link library and WDM driver respectively, +and the "large" keyword marks the executable as able to handle addresses +larger than 2 GB. + After those settings can follow the "at" operator and a numerical expression +specifying the base of PE image and then optionally "on" operator followed by +the quoted string containing file name selects custom MZ stub for PE program +(when specified file is not a MZ executable, it is treated as a flat binary +executable file and converted into MZ format). The default code setting for +this format is 32-bit. The example of fully featured PE format declaration: + + format PE GUI 4.0 DLL at 7000000h on 'stub.exe' + + To create PE file for the x86-64 architecture, use "PE64" keyword instead of +"PE" in the format declaration, in such case the long mode code is generated +by default. + "section" directive defines a new section, it should be followed by quoted +string defining the name of section, then one or more section flags can +follow. Available flags are: "code", "data", "readable", "writeable", +"executable", "shareable", "discardable", "notpageable". The origin of section +is aligned to page (4096 bytes). Example declaration of PE section: + + section '.text' code readable executable + +Among with flags also one of the special PE data identifiers can be specified +to mark the whole section as a special data, possible identifiers are +"export", "import", "resource" and "fixups". If the section is marked to +contain fixups, they are generated automatically and no more data needs to be +defined in this section. Also resource data can be generated automatically +from the resource file, it can be achieved by writing the "from" operator and +quoted file name after the "resource" identifier. Below are the examples of +sections containing some special PE data: + + section '.reloc' data discardable fixups + section '.rsrc' data readable resource from 'my.res' + + "entry" directive sets the entry point for Portable Executable, the value of +entry point should follow. + "stack" directive sets up the size of stack for Portable Executable, value +of stack reserve size should follow, optionally value of stack commit +separated with comma can follow. When stack is not defined, it's set by +default to size of 4096 bytes. + "heap" directive chooses the size of heap for Portable Executable, value of +heap reserve size should follow, optionally value of heap commit separated +with comma can follow. When no heap is defined, it is set by default to size +of 65536 bytes, when size of heap commit is unspecified, it is by default set +to zero. + "data" directive begins the definition of special PE data, it should be +followed by one of the data identifiers ("export", "import", "resource" or +"fixups") or by the number of data entry in PE header. The data should be +defined in next lines, ended with "end data" directive. When fixups data +definition is chosen, they are generated automatically and no more data needs +to be defined there. The same applies to the resource data when the "resource" +identifier is followed by "from" operator and quoted file name - in such case +data is taken from the given resource file. + The "rva" operator can be used inside the numerical expressions to obtain +the RVA of the item addressed by the value it is applied to, that is the +offset relative to the base of PE image. + + +2.4.3 Common Object File Format + +To select Common Object File Format, use "format COFF" or "format MS COFF" +directive, depending whether you want to create classic (DJGPP) or Microsoft's +variant of COFF file. The default code setting for this format is 32-bit. To +create the file in Microsoft's COFF format for the x86-64 architecture, use +"format MS64 COFF" setting, in such case long mode code is generated by +default. + "section" directive defines a new section, it should be followed by quoted +string defining the name of section, then one or more section flags can +follow. Section flags available for both COFF variants are "code" and "data", +while flags "readable", "writeable", "executable", "shareable", "discardable", +"notpageable", "linkremove" and "linkinfo" are available only with Microsoft's +COFF variant. + By default section is aligned to double word (four bytes), in case of +Microsoft COFF variant other alignment can be specified by providing the +"align" operator followed by alignment value (any power of two up to 8192) +among the section flags. + "extrn" directive defines the external symbol, it should be followed by the +name of symbol and optionally the size operator specifying the size of data +labeled by this symbol. The name of symbol can be also preceded by quoted +string containing name of the external symbol and the "as" operator. +Some example declarations of external symbols: + + extrn exit + extrn '__imp__MessageBoxA@16' as MessageBox:dword + + "public" directive declares the existing symbol as public, it should be +followed by the name of symbol, optionally it can be followed by the "as" +operator and the quoted string containing name under which symbol should be +available as public. Some examples of public symbols declarations: + + public main + public start as '_start' + +Additionally, with COFF format it's possible to specify exported symbol as +static, it's done by preceding the name of symbol with the "static" keyword. + When using the Microsoft's COFF format, the "rva" operator can be used +inside the numerical expressions to obtain the RVA of the item addressed by the +value it is applied to. + +2.4.4 Executable and Linkable Format + +To select ELF output format, use "format ELF" directive. The default code +setting for this format is 32-bit. To create ELF file for the x86-64 +architecture, use "format ELF64" directive, in such case the long mode code is +generated by default. + "section" directive defines a new section, it should be followed by quoted +string defining the name of section, then can follow one or both of the +"executable" and "writeable" flags, optionally also "align" operator followed +by the number specifying the alignment of section (it has to be the power of +two), if no alignment is specified, the default value is used, which is 4 or 8, +depending on which format variant has been chosen. + "extrn" and "public" directives have the same meaning and syntax as when the +COFF output format is selected (described in previous section). + The "rva" operator can be used also in the case of this format (however not +when target architecture is x86-64), it converts the address into the offset +relative to the GOT table, so it may be useful to create position-independent +code. There's also a special "plt" operator, which allows to call the external +functions through the Procedure Linkage Table. You can even create an alias +for external function that will make it always be called through PLT, with +the code like: + + extrn 'printf' as _printf + printf = PLT _printf + + To create executable file, follow the format choice directive with the +"executable" keyword and optionally the number specifying the brand of the +target operating system (for example value 3 would mark the executable +for Linux system). With this format selected it is allowed to use "entry" +directive followed by the value to set as entry point of program. On the other +hand it makes "extrn" and "public" directives unavailable, and instead of +"section" there should be the "segment" directive used, followed by one or +more segment permission flags and optionally a marker of special ELF +executable segment, which can be "interpreter", "dynamic" or "note". The +origin of segment is aligned to page (4096 bytes), and available permission +flags are: "readable", "writeable" and "executable". + +EOF diff --git a/data/it/docs/HOT_KEYS.TXT b/data/it/docs/HOT_KEYS.TXT new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..eb10fd025a --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/docs/HOT_KEYS.TXT @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +Le seguenti scorciatoie di tasiera sono valide in tutto il sistema +1) Ctrl + Alt + Del avvia il gestore dei processi mostranod i consumi del sistema +start of the application CPU (the manager of processes), is a sole combination maintained on a level of a kernel, all rest "hot" key is realized at the expense of the application @PANEL. +2) Ctrl + Shift cambia lingua della tastiera +3) Win Apre il MENU +4) Alt + Ctrl + F12 Fa partire l'applicazione END- start of the application END. +5) Alt + F4 Termina l'applicazione in uso +6) Alt + Tab Permette di passare da una applicazione aperta all'altra +7) Alt + Shift + Tab Permette di passare da una applicazione aperta all'altra in ordine inverso +8) Alt + Shift + NumLock Fa partire l'applicazione MOUSEMUL, che permette di emulare il mouse con il numpad, when NumLock è attivato +9) Alt + 1...7 Permette di selezionare una specifica linga per la tastiera +10) Win + D minimizza/ripristina tutte le finestre in uso +11) Win + R Inizializza l'applicazione Esegui +12) Alt + Ctrl + ArrowLeft Permette di scorrere le applicazioni nella taskbar +13) Alt + Ctrl + ArrowRight Permette di scorrere le applicazioni nella taskbar in ordine inverso +14) PrintScreen Esegue l'applicazione SCRSHOOT. Permette di effettuare uno screenshoot e di salvare l'immagine come file bmp. diff --git a/data/it/docs/INI.TXT b/data/it/docs/INI.TXT new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ae7e83c565 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/docs/INI.TXT @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +I file ini sono file di testo dal seguente tipo di contenuto + +[Nome prima sezione] +Key1=value1 +Key2=value2 +;commento +[Nome seconda sezione] +Key3=value3 + +Tutte le righe che iniziano con ';' sono considerate dei commenti e ignorate, servono per migliorare la leggibilità + +Le scorciatoie da tastiera sono descritte nel seguente modo: +u numero qualsiasi di modificatori Ctrl/Alt/Shift/LCtrl/LAlt/LShift/RCtrl/RAlt/RShift, +seguiti da una carattere alfanumerico o uno dei seguenti simboli su tastiera: +F1 - F12 +Home; End; PgUp; PgDn; Ins, equivalentemente, Insert; Del, equivalentemente, Delete; +Tab; Plus; Esc; Enter; Backspace; Space; +Left (left arrow); Right (right arrow); Up (up arrow); Down (down arrow). +Le scorciatoie sono case sensitive, e possono essere scritte senza il simbolo + +per il concatenamento, ad esempio: +Ctrl+Alt+Backspace +RCtrl+RShift +ShiftA +f10 +shiftalt5 diff --git a/data/it/docs/INSTALL.TXT b/data/it/docs/INSTALL.TXT new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cf67c82237 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/docs/INSTALL.TXT @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ +Requisiti minimi di sistema per Kolibri 0.7.x.0: +* CPU: Pentium, AMD 5x86 oppure Cyrix 5x86 senza MMX con frequenza 100 MHz +* RAM: 8 Mb +* Scheda video: supporting VGA (640*480*16 mode) or Vesa +* Tastiera: AT +* Mouse: COM or PS/2 + +Il sistema può essere avviato da uno dei seguenti dispositivi +- Floppy 3.5 +- IDE HDD LBA +- CD/DVD +- Chiave USB + +I. Installazione su floppy + 1) Inserire un floppy non danneggiato nel computer. + 2) Scriverci sopra il file kolibri.img con un metodo qualsiasi a + disposizione, ad esempio: + a) (se si sta usando KolibriOS) usando il programma rdsave e + selezionando il floppy su cui salvare il contenuto + b) (per DOS e Windows) è possibile eseguire il file install.bat + c) con programmi come WinImage o analoghi (ad esempio DiskExplorer) + d) (per GNU/Linux) marcare come eseguibile lo script install.sh ed + eseguirlo +Ora è possibile far partire il computer da floppy (è necessario riavviare +il computer e settare nel BIOS la voce relativa all'avvio da floppy) + +II. Installazione su disco fisico. +Esistono diversi bootloader da poter usare, tra cui anche il bootloader +GRUB dei sistemi GNU/Linux, e tutti dovrebbero essere ing rado di far +partire il file kolibri.img +Se si ha gia installato una vecchia versione di Kolibri, allora è +sufficiente sostituire il file kolibri.img +Se invece si sta eseguendo kolibri da Cd live, allora esso non contiene +il file kolibri.img. Con il programma rdsave è possibile crearlo, basta +indicare su quale partizione salvare il file. Poiché KolibriOS deve +essere in grado di scrivere sulla partizione, serve che questa sia di +tipo FAT +1) Il loader mtldr (scritto da Diamond) - funziona con + DOS/Win95/98/NT/2k/XP/Vista, e partizioni del tipo FAT32 and NTFS, e + può essere installato su qualsiasi cartella del disco. + Per usarlo basta eseguire il file HD_load\mtldr_install.exe e + selezionare il file kolibri.img + Co questo metodo è possibile installare anche più file immagine di + Kolibri. +2) Anche il loader MeOSLoad (scritto da Trans, migliorato da Mario79) + funziona con DOS/Win95/98, su partizioni di tipo FAT32. Si trova, + insieme alla relativa documentazione, nella cartella HD_load\MeOSLoad. +3) Esiste un programma, 9x2klbr (scritto da Diamond) in grado di avviare + Kolibri direttamente da Windows 95/98/Me, il programma funziona con + le partizioni FAT32 e NTFS. +4) È possibile usare il bootloader GRUB per caricare Kolibri. È + necessario usare il file 'memdisk', come descritto da derPENGUIN sul + forum (http://meos32.7.forumer.com/viewtopic.php?t=110). + Il metodo suggerito (descritto da Alver) è stato testato con + grub-0.97-19mdv2007.0. + 1. Kolibri può scrivere solamente sui filesystem di tipo FAT, se + quindi il file immagine non si trova su una partizione di questo + tipo, non sarà in grado di salvare eventuali impostazioni. + 2. Questo metodo richiede il file 'memdisk' dal pacchetto 'syslinux' + (http://syslinux.zytor.com). + 3. È sufficiente posizionare il file 'memdisk' nella cartella '/boot' + oppure nella stessa partizione usata da KolibriOS. + 4. Aggiungere al file 'menu.lst' ('grub.conf') le seguenti righe di + configurazione: + + title KolibriOS + kernel (hd[Hard disk number],[partition number])[path]/memdisk + initrd (hd[Hard disk number],[partition number])[path]/kolibri.img + + (NOTA: La numerazione delle partizioni di GRUB parte da 0.) + Esempio: + title KolibriOS + kernel (hd0,0)/boot/memdisk + initrd (hd0,3)/kolibri/kolibri.img + + La prima variante era: + + label KolibriOS + root (hd[numero disco fisso],[numero partizione]) + kernel [percorso]/memdisk + initrd [percorso]/kolibri.img + + In questo caso 'memdisk' e 'kolibri.img' devono essere sulla + stessa partizione. + + Esempio: + label KolibriOS + root (hd0,0) + kernel /boot/memdisk + initrd /boot/kolibri.img + Con questa variante, descritta nel forum, KolibriOS è posizionato + nella cartella di boot di GN/Linux, quindi non si trova su una + partizione FAT32 e non sarà in grado di salvare eventuali modifiche. + +5) I comandi descritti precedentemente potrebbero non funzionare con + GRUB2, (testato da Apocalypse_dn), in tal caso sostituire "linux16" e + "initrd16" a "kernel" and "initrd" (suggerito da vkos). + +III. Installazione su chiave USB. +Nella cartella HD_load\USB_Boot è possibile trovare un loader che +permette di installare KolibriOS su chiave USB. Se la chiave USB non è +formattata in FAT32 usare il contenuto della cartella HD_load\USB_Boot_old. + + +IV. Installazione su CD/DVD. +Esiste una versione speciale di KolibriOS, che contiene, oltra al contenuto presente sul file immagine per i floppy, alcuni programmi pesanti (per gli standard di KolibriOS): +l'emulatore DosBox, i giochi "Fixed Rate Pig" e "sokoban". +È possibile creare un CD live partendo dal file kolibri.img, aggiungendo +tutto quello che si desidera. Successivamente basta un programma per +scrivere su CD/DVD per avere un CD Live. +//non chiaro +The appropriate actions are determined by used CD/DVD write program +(focus on words such as "boot floppy emulation"). diff --git a/data/it/docs/KFAR_KEYS.TXT b/data/it/docs/KFAR_KEYS.TXT new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0192edee29 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/docs/KFAR_KEYS.TXT @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +Scorciatoie da tastiera per il programma KFar. + +Per i pannelli: + frecce, Home, End - muove il cursore sul pannello attivo + Tab - cambia pannello attivo + Enter - entra nella cartella oppure esegue il programma selezionato + F3 - visualizza file selezionato + F5 - copia elementi selezionati nell'altro pannello + Shift+F5 - copia elementi selezionati nello stesso pannello + (ovviamente è necessario specificare un altro nome per i file) + F7 - crea cartella + F8 - cancella gli elementi selezionati + F10 - esce + Alt+F1/Alt+F2 - cambia pannello + Alt+F9 - ingrandisce finestra oppure rimpicciolisce alla dimensione + iniziale + Ctrl+F3 - ordina file e cartelle del pannello attivo per nome + Ctrl+F4 - ordina file e cartelle del pannello attivo per estensione + Ctrl+F5 - ordina file e cartelle del pannello attivo per data + dell'ultima modifica + Ctrl+F6 - ordina file e cartelle del pannello attivo per dimensione + Ctrl+F7 - non ordina, visualizza nell'ordine in cui si trovano sul + - disco ingr + Ctrl+F8 - ordina file e cartelle del pannello attivo per data di + - creazione + Ctrl+F9 - ordina file e cartelle del pannello attivo per data di ultimo + - accesso + F12 - visualizza screen menu + Ctrl+R - aggiorna il pannello attivo + Menu - Mostra il context menu per i file selezionati + LeftCtrl+1/2/3/4 - cambia modalità pannello (brief/medium/full/wide) + RightCtrl+0..9 - va nella cartelle specificata nella sezione + [FolderShortcuts] del file ini relativo a Shortcut0..9 + Insert - (de)selezione elemento corrente + Grey[+] - Selezione file e cartelle filtrati + Grey[-] - Selezione file e cartelle non filtrati + I filtri sono del tipo "*.asm,*.inc|template.asm" (seleziona tutti i + file con estensione asm e inc, esclusi quelli chiamati template.asm). + il filtro "*.*" seleziona tutti i file che contengono il carattere + ".", quindi tutti quelli che hanno una estensione, per selezionare + tutti i file usare "*". + Il parametro "|" serve per escludere alcuni elementi, mentre ',' o + ';' servono a concatenare più criteri. + Grey[*] - Inverte selezione + Alt+ - posiziona il cursore sul file che inizia per la + lettera o cifra digitata. + Mostra inoltre una finestra nella quale è possibile scrivere una + successione di caratteri alfanumerici per effettuare una ricerca + più precisa. Le combinazioni Ctrl+Enter/Shift+Ctrl+Enter servono + per spostarsi tra gli elementi inclusi nei risultati di ricerca. + +Per il visualizzatore: + Esc = F3 = F10 = Numpad5 - esci + Down - linea successiva + PgDn - pagina successiva + Up - linea precedente + PgUp - pagina precedente + Home - Vai a inizio file + End - Vai a fine file + Left - carattere a destra + Right - carattere a sinistra + Ctrl+Left - nella modalità testo 20 caratteri a sinistra; + nella modalità Hex 1 byte a sinistra + Ctrl+Right - nella modalità testo 20 caratteri a destra; + nella modalità Hex 1 byte a destra + Ctrl+Shift+Left - Vai alla prima riga su schermo + Ctrl+Shift+Right - Vai alla prima riga su schermo + F2 - toggle line wrap + F4 - cambia tra modalità testo e hex + F8 - cambia tra codifica cp866 (DOS) e cp1251 (Win) + Shift+F8 - encoding tables menu + F12 - mostra il menu + F7 - cerca una stringa a partire dalla attuale posizione + (the string and settings are set in the following dialog) + Shift+F7 - continua la ricerca precedente + (use the string and settings from last search by F7) + Alt+F9 - ingrandisce finestra oppure rimpicciolisce alla dimensione + iniziale + +Per l'editor: + Esc = F10 - Esci; se il file è stato modificato chiede se salvare le + modifiche + Shift+F10 - Salva ed esci + F2 - Salva il file + Down - muovi il cursore in basso di una riga + PgDn - muovi il cursore in basso di una pagina + Up - muovi il cursore in alto di una riga + PgUp - muovi il cursore in alto di una pagina + Left - muovi il cursore di una posizione a sinistra + Right - muovi il cursore di una posizione a destra + Home - muovi il cursore all'inizio dell riga corrente + End - muovi il cursore alla fine della riga attuale + Backspace - cancella il simbolo che precede il cursore + Del - cancella il simbolo sotto il cursore + Ins - Cambia tra modalità inserici e sostituisci quando si immettono simboli + F12 - mostra il menu + Alt+F9 - ingrandisce finestra oppure rimpicciolisce alla dimensione + iniziale + F7 - cerca una stringa a partire da dove è posizionato il cursore + (la stringa da cercare e altri parametri sono da mettere nella finistra che appare) + Shift+F7 - continua a cercare + + diamond + mailto:diamondz@land.ru diff --git a/data/it/docs/MTDBG.TXT b/data/it/docs/MTDBG.TXT new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fdf12abba2 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/docs/MTDBG.TXT @@ -0,0 +1,238 @@ +Introduzione. + +mtdbg è un debugger per il sistema operativo KolibriOS. Questo documento +descrive come utilizzare tale programma. Per eventuali domande conviene +scrivere sul forum (in russo, ma esiste anche una sezione inglese) + -- board.kolibrios.org. + +Descrizione generica. + +mtdbg è in grado di fare il debug di un solo programma alla volta, se non +viene caricato nessun programma, il debug viene disabilitato. + +Il programma è a linea di comando, e accetta in input comandi da tastiera +La linea di comando è posizionata in basso, e accetta in input tasti +Backspace,Delete,Home,End,frecce sinistra/destra. +I comandi non sono case-sensitive e il delimitatore è un numero arbitrario +non nullo di spazi. + +Per chiudere il debugger è sufficiente usare il comando "quit" senza +nessun argomento, altrimenti da interfaccia cliccando sul pulsante di +chiusura come per le altre applicazioni. + +Quando il debugger viene avviato senza argomenti, non viene caricato +nessun programma. Se invece viene avviato con degli argomenti, mtdbg +cercherà di caricare il programma indicato come primo argomento e con +eventuali parametri per il programma passati come argomenti successivi. + +È possibile caricare un qualsiasi programma in un secondo +momento con il comando +load [] +ad esempio: +load /rd/1/example +LOAD /rd/1/aclock w200 h200 + LoaD /hd0/1/menuetos/dosbox/dosbox +negli esempi, mtdbg caricherà il programma passato come primo argomenti, +un eventuale secondo argomento è il parametro da passare al programma +che si vuole caricare. +Il comando "load" restituisce in output nel "messages window", poco più +in alto della linea di comando, se il programma è stato caricato con +successo o meno. In caso di errore, verra mostrata la causa. +L'errore più comune è del tipo, "file not found", probabilmente perché +si è digitato in modo errato il percorso o il nome del programma da +caricare. + +Il debugger è in grado di caricare file con simboli relativi al +programma di cui si vuole effetuare il debug. +Si tratta di file di testo, dei quali ogni riga inizia con +0x +(righe che non iniziano in questo modo vengono ignorate). Tali file si +possono creare a mano o tramite fasm. È possibile caricare questi file +esplicitamente con il comando +load-symbols +Inoltre, quando viene eseguito il comando "load", mtdbg controllerà +la presenza di un file contenente simboli relativi al programma e di +estensione .dbg (nel primo esempio controlla la presenza del file +/rd/1/example.dbg). Se tale file esiste, questo viene caricato +automaticamente and if such file exists, e verrà notificato tramite il +messaggio "Symbols loaded", se il caricamento viene eseguito con +successo. + +Può succedere che un programma che si vuole caricare è stato +compresso. La compressione funziona, in linea generale, nel +seguente modo: il file di input viene compresso (da qualche +programma apposito), successivamente viene aggiunto un pezzo di codice +che all'avvio del programma effettua una decompressione in memoria. +Se un programma è stato compresso, il suo codice non è visibile al +debugger, e deve venir prima decompresso. +mtdbg è in grado di determinare la maggior parte di compressori +(mxp,mxp_lzo,mxp_nrv,mtappack) e in questi casi suggerisce in automatico +di effettuare la decompressione per vedere il codice del programma. +È sufficiente pigiare 'y' e enter per accettare l'opzione, altrimenti +rifiutarla. Se non viene riconosciuto il metodo di compressione, è +sempre possibile usare il comando unpack (senza argomenti). +Tale comando è da usare solamente se si è sicuro che il programma sia +compresso e che non sia già stato decompresso dal debugger. +[A partire da Kolibri 0.6.5.0, questo paragrafo non è più attuale poiché +è possibile comprimere le applicazioni con kpack e il decompressore è +implementato a livello kernel, in modo da rendere il debug trasparente] + +Un programma caricato può essere terminato tramite il comando +"terminate" senza argomenti. Il comando "detach", senza parametri +aggiuntivi "stacca" il programma dal debugger, nel senso che questo +continuerà la sua normale esecuzione senza il debugger, come se questo +non vi fosse mai stato. +Dato uno di questi due comandi, l'attività di debug viene terminata. + +È possibile ricaricare il programma precedente con il comando "reload", +senza parametri. Se nel frattempo è stato caricato un altro programma, +questo viene terminato e viene ricaricato il programma precedente con +gli argomenti passati precedentemente, come se fossero stati dati i +comandi +terminate +load +Il vantaggio di reload sta nel fatto di essere più immediato e che viene +mantenuto l'indirizzo di memoria, mentre con il comando load questo +viene spostato all'indirizzo 0. (vedi sotto) + +Il comando "help", oppure "h", è sempre disponibile. +Tutti i comandi sono divisi in gruppi +"help" senza argomenti mostra l'elenco dei comandi disponibili +"help" con il nome di un gruppo mostra i comandi relativi al gruppo +"help" con il nome di un comando mostra informazioni sull'uso di tale + comando +esempi: +help +help control +h LoaD + +La finestra del debugger è composta dai seguenti elementi enumerati +dall'alto al basso: +- status string. Se è stato caricato un programma, mostra il suo nome e + stato ("Running/Paused"), altrimenti "No program + loaded". +- registers window - Mostra valori di caratteri generico, valori di + registro e stato delle singole flag: + CF,PF,AF,ZF,SF,DF,OF: se una flag viene rimossa, + allora è contrassegnata da lettere minuscole, se + creata allora da lettere maiuscole. I valori di + registro che vengono modificati sono contrassegnati + in verde. +- data window (dump window) - mostra la porzione di memoria contenente + il programma caricato +- code window (disassembler window) - mostra il codice del programma come + "disassembled instructions" +- messages window +- command line window + +Nella "Dump window" è possibile osservare i dati a partire da ogni +indirizzo, usare il comando +d +Il comando "d", senza parametri mostra la "dump window". +In modo analogo funziona il seguente comando per la "code window" +u +oppure "u". +Esempi: +d esi - mostra i dati all'indirizzo esi (e.g. utile prima di eseguire + una istruzione rep movsb) +d esp - mostra lo stack +u eip - disassembla le istruzioni a partire dall'attuale indirizzo + +Le espressioni in mtdbg possono includere +- costanti esadecimali +- nomi generici dei registri degli indirizzi (8 32-bits, 8 16-bits e + 8 8-bits) e registri eip; valori di 16- e 8-bits sono riempiti nel + registro di 0 fino a raggiungere i 32 bit. +- quattro operatori aritmetici +,-,*,/ (con le priorità standard) e le + parentesi +- [se sono stati caricati i simboli del programma] nomi, caricati dal + file dbg +Tutti i calcoli sono effettuati modulo 2^32. +Esempi di espressioni: +eax +eip+2 +ecx-esi-1F +al+AH*bl +ax + 2* bH*(eip+a73) +3*esi*di/EAX +Il comando +? +calcola il valore della espressione passata come argomento. + +I valori del registro caricato nel programma può essere modificato con +il comando "r" in uno dei seguenti modi (sono equivalenti) +r +r = + +Supponendo che sia stato caricato un programma con successo per il +debug, subito dopo il programma verrà sospeso e non più eseguito. +Premendo Ctrl+F7 (oppure dalla linea di comando "s") è possibile far +effettuare una azione al programma, dopodiché questo verrà sospeso +immediatamente, e il debugger mostrerà i nuovi valori nel registro e in +memoria. +la chiamata di sistema "int 40h" è considerata una azione. +Premendo Ctrl+F8 (oppure dalla linea di comando "p") permette di +eseguire il programma, e chiamate a procedure esterne, cicli e altre +strutture di controllo oppure operazioni con prefisso rep/repz/repnz +verranno interpretate come una singola azione. +Solitamente si chiede di eseguire azioni singole su sezioni di +programmi, ad esempio per tenere traccia dei valori in memoria e nel +registro. +Il comando +g +riprende l'esecuzione del programma e attende che il controllo vada a +eip=indirizzo dato, e in quel momento sospende il programma. +Se il comando "g" viene dato senza argomenti, viene semplicemente +ripresa l'esecuzione del programma. + +Per sospendere l'esecuzione del programma è sufficiente usare il comando +"stop", senza parametri o argomenti. + +In una situazione standard il programma viene eseguito normalmente, +quando sono soddisfatte alcune condizioni, il programma viene sospeso e +invia un segnale al debugger. Tali condizioni sono chiamate +"breakpoints" o "breaks". +L'utilizzo principale dei breakpoints è quello di interrompere +l'esecuzione del programma in determinati punti. I breakpoint si +impostano con il comando +bp +Si noti che se è presente un solo breakpoint, allora è più conveniente +usare il comando "g" con parametri. + +Vi sono altri tipi di breakpoint che permettono di accedera ad una data +area di memoria. Il numero massimo di breakpoint di questo tipo sono 4, +causa limitazioni hardware. +bpm - interrompe ad ogni accesso ad ogni byte ad un + indirizzo dato +bpm w - interrompe alla scrittura di ogni byte ad un + indirizzo dato +bpmb,bpmw,bpmd - interrompe all'accesso di ogni byte, o + dword all'indirizzo dato. bpm e bpmb sono + sinonimi. Quando viene usato bpmw o bpmd, + gli indirizzi devono essere del tipo + corrispondenti al tipo di dato, quindi + per i word è dispari, per i dword è + divisibile per 4. +bpmb,bpmw,bpmd w - simile al break in scrittura. + +Per vedere la lista dei breakpoints impostati, usare il comando "bl", +per ottenere informazioni su un particolare breakpoint, usare il +comando "bl ". +È possibile rimuovere i breakpoint con il comando "bc ", oppure +disabilitati momentaneamente con il comando "bd " e riabilitati +con "be " + +Note. +1. Quando si effettua il debug di un proprio programma, è possibile + mettere nel codice istruzione int3. Queste istruzioni creano delle + eccezioni durante la normale esecuzione, che porta alla terminazione + del programma, ma durante l'attività di debug permette di non dover + pensare agli indirizzi di memoria da usare nei comandi g e bp. +2. La notazione standard per l'output e input è quella esadecimale. +3. Quando il programma viene eseguito, la finestra del registro e dei + dati mostrano delle informazioni prima dell'avvio. Non si possono + impostare i valori di registro in questo mode. Tuttavia il + comando "d" in questo modo mostra informazioni che erano vere nel + momento in cui si è immesso il comando. + + diamond diff --git a/data/it/docs/README.TXT b/data/it/docs/README.TXT new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..84a66dd65a --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/docs/README.TXT @@ -0,0 +1,269 @@ + ************************ + * Kolibri OS 0.7.7.0+ * + * Febbraio 2010 * + ************************ + + L'ultima versione di KolibriOS è disponibile sul sito ufficiale: + http://kolibrios.org + + Se ci sono domande potete trovare supporto sul nostro forum + http://board.kolibrios.org (russo, inglese) + + *********************************** + * Novità di questa release * + *********************************** + + Sono state apportate le seguenti modifiche, revisioni e correzioni + nel kernel (il testo è in inglese): + + From Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond) - Russian Federation + 1) Improvement of drives detection using BIOS service (V86) + 2) Kernel bugfixes. + + From Sergey Semyonov (Serge) - Russian Federation + 1) Driver for ATI videocards updated. + 2) Linux-like kernel mutexes + + From Mihail Semenyako (mike.dld) - Republic of Belarus + 1) Refactoring of window subsystem. + + From + 1) Processing API functions in order to completely remove the shift-register-call + 2) Refactoring, optimization, bugfixes of some places in the kernel. + + From A.Jerdev (art_zh) - United Kingdom + 1) Memory-mapped I/O (MMIO) access from the userworld. + 2) PCIe Extended configuration space access (auto-adjust for AMD-NPT since Athlon64). + + From turbanoff + 1) Read from ext2fs/ext3fs. + + From Marat Zakiyanov (Mario79) - Russian Federation + 1) Improvements in the processing of mouse clicks. + + From hidnplayr + 1) Rewriting of the entire network subsystem. + + From Asper + 1) Drivers for the sound cards VT823(X) and EMU10K1X. + + From tsdima + 1) Driver for the sound card ForteMedia fm801. + + From Maxis + 1) changes in free memory checks. + + + + + Sono state apportate le seguenti modifiche, revisioni e correzioni + nelle applicazioni (il testo é in inglese): + + * Nuove versioni di applicazioni e nuove applicazioni: + + FTPS - tsdima, some improvements + VIEW3DS - macgub, version 0.054 + FASM - Pavel Rymovski (Heavyiron), updated to version 1.69.11 + IgorA, use the library box_lib, russification, + Marat Zakiyanov (Mario79) fix bugs encountered + Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond), fix of window wrapping + PCIDEV - art_zh, MMIO sample dumps added; vendors database + trimmed to reduce the distro size. + BOARD - Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond), do not throw out existing + messages at the program start + UNVWATER - Asper, demo ported from OctaOS + (the author is Octavio Vega Fernandez). + HEED - staper, version 0.14: use the library box_lib; + Ctrl+C/X/V, Ctrl+B to select a block + Marat Zakiyanov (Mario79), using of OpenDialog component, + little optimization of the code + SHELL - Albom, version 0.4.2 + CPU - Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond) at the suggestion of + Kirill Lipatov (Leency), do not show system processes + by default + HTMLV - Kirill Lipatov (Leency), version 0.62a + EOLITE - Kirill Lipatov (Leency), version 0.98.7a + RTFREAD - Sorcerer, cosmetic fix + dunkaist, menu_bar and scroll_bar from box_lib, 'end' hotkey + E80 - Albom, version 0.5.1 + KIV - Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond), file name in the window + title, configurable keyboard shortcuts for next/prev + images in the current folder + SUDOKU - staper, port of Sudoku game - that is a puzzle with digits, where you + have to fill free cells with digits from 1 to 9 so that every row, + every column and every small square 3x3 contain each digit just one time. + There are 9 levels in the game. + REVERSI - staper, port of strategy game Reversi (Othello) + MSQUARE - staper, math puzzle "magic square": sum of the numbers in rows, columns + (less often in diagonals) should be equal + FINDN-S - Artemonische, a simple game in which you have to collect all the numbers + in the order of 10 to 90 + PANEL - Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond), a little change in the panel clock + and reanimation of backlight on the Alt+[Shift+]Tab press. + AC97SND - Asper, support of playlists in m3u format. + @NOTIFY - SoUrcerer, program for popup text messages + DOSBOX - Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond), version 0.74 + ASCIIVJU - Konstantin Dutkevich (Nazarus), program shows ASCII table + PIPETKA - Rock_maniak_forever, program to get color of a pixel on the screen + SNAKE - dunkaist, yet another implementation of classic game + + + + + * Nuove versioni delle librerie dinamiche e nuove librerie dinamiche: + libini - Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond), added function to read + keyboard shortcuts + box_lib - IgorA, update component tree_list, new component + text_editor, documentation on the library + Marat Zakiyanov (Mario79) refinement of ОpenDialog component, rewriting + of some applications to use it, new component PathShow + + + +/------------------------------------------------\ +* Date di pubblicazione dei kit di distribuzione * +\------------------------------------------------/ + +RE N1 30.08.2003 +RE N2 07.10.2003 +RE N3 26.11.2003 +RE N4 23.12.2003 +RE N5 15.02.2004 +RE N6 27.03.2004 +KOLIBRI N1 16.05.2004 +RE N7 11.06.2004 +KOLIBRI N2 28.08.2004 +RE N8 01.12.2004 +KOLIBRI N3 22.02.2005 + Beta 2: 20.03.2005 +KOLIBRI N4 07.06.2005 +KOLIBRI 0.5.0.0 04.10.2005 + 0.5.1.0 12.10.2005 + 0.5.2.0 02.12.2005 + 0.5.3.0 18.03.2006 + 0.5.8.0 09.07.2006 + 0.5.8.1 25.07.2006 + + 0.6.0.0 04.09.2006 + 0.6.3.0 31.10.2006 + 0.6.5.0 14.02.2007 + + 0.7.0.0 07.06.2007 + 0.7.1.0 23.09.2007 + 0.7.5.0 31.01.2009 + 0.7.7.0 13.12.2009 + +/----------------\ +* KolibriOS TEAM * +\----------------/ + +Questa lista contiene i nomi di tutti coloro che hanno partecipati in +modo attivo alla creazione e manutenzione, ove e quando possibile, al +progetto KolibriOS. + (I nomi sono enumerati in base a quando si sono aggiunte al progetto, a partire da chi ha partecipato sin dall'inizio, fino a chi si è aggregato negli ultimi giorni) + +* Trans \ +* VaStaNi | +* Ivan Poddubny | +* Marat Zakiyanov (Mario79) | +* Mihail Semenyako (mike.dld) | Programmazione del sistema +* Sergey Kuzmin (Wildwest) | +* Andrey Halyavin (halyavin) | loader, +* Mihail Lisovin (Mihasik) | miglioramenti al kernel +* Andrey Ignatiev (andrew_programmer) | e via dicendo +* NoName | +* Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond) | +* Iliya Mihailov (Ghost) | +* Sergey Semyonov (Serge) | +* Johnny_B | +* kasTIgar | +* SPraid | +* Rus | +* Alver | +* Maxis | +* Galkov | +* CleverMouse | +* tsdima | +* turbanoff | +* Asper | +* art_zh / + +* Mihail Lisovin (Mihasik) \ +* Andrey Ivushkin (Willow) | +* Mihail Semenyako (mike.dld) | +* Pavlushin Evgeny (Exis) | +* Ivan Poddubny | Programmazione di applicazioni +* Marat Zakiyanov (Mario79) | +* Sergey Kuzmin (Wildwest) | +* Andrey Halyavin (halyavin) | creazione di nuove e +* Hex | port di esistenti, +* Andrey Ignatiev (andrew_programmer) | come anche revisione +* ealex | di vecchie applicazioni +* Olaf | +* Evgeny Grechnikov (Diamond) | +* Navanax | +* Johnny_B | +* Pavel Rymovski (Heavyiron) | +* Vitaly Bendik (mistifi(ator) | +* Iliya Mihailov (Ghost) | +* Maxim Evtihov (Maxxxx32) | +* Vladimir Zaitsev (Rabid Rabbit) | +* vectoroc | +* Alexey Teplov () | +* Sergey Semyonov (Serge) | +* YELLOW | +* iadn | +* Maciej Guba (macgub) | +* Mario Birkner (cYfleXX) | +* hidden player (hidnplayr) | +* trolly | +* nilgui | +* kaitz | +* DedOk | +* SPraid | +* Rus | +* Alver | +* Dron2004 | +* Gluk | +* Aleksandr Bogomaz (Albom) | +* Kirill Lipatov (Leency) | +* Vasiliy Kosenko (vkos) | +* IgorA | +* staper | +* chaykin | +* Alexander Meshcheryakov | + (Self-Perfection) | +* CleverMouse | +* tsdima | +* art_zh | +* Asper | +* Pterox | +* Artemonische | +* dunkaist / + +* Hex \ +* Diamond / Documentazione + +* CodeWorld \ Forum http://meos.sysbin.com +* mike.dld / Sito web http://kolibrios.org; Server SVN + +* Alexey Teplov () \ (logo) +* goglus | Design (sfondo) +* Kirill Lipatov (Leency) / (icone) + +* Pavel Rymovski (Heavyiron) \ +* Vitaly Bendik (mistifi(ator) | +* vectoroc | +* Veliant | testing +* AqwAS | +* Mike | +* camper | +* Dmitry the Sorcerer | +* Ataualpa | +* Maxis | +* Galkov | +* ChE / + +e altri... + + KolibriOS team diff --git a/data/it/docs/STACK.TXT b/data/it/docs/STACK.TXT new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1d342b97fa --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/docs/STACK.TXT @@ -0,0 +1,387 @@ +Cosaè implementato +================== + +Le seguenti feature sono presenti nel codice stack TCP/IP: + + IP layer. + ICMP. + TCP layer. + UDP layer. + local loopback. + Realtek 8029 PCI ethernet interface. + Realtek 8139 PCI ethernet interface. + Intel i8255x PCI ethernet interface. + Dynamic ARP table. + PPP dialer + +E sono implementate le seguenti applicazioni: + + Server HTTP + Telnet + Client POP + DNS Name resolver + Server MP3 + Client TFTP + Client IRC + +Vi sono inoltre applicazioni sperimentali, per los terming di musica e +per la comunicazione via socket, in fase di sviluppo vi è anche un +browser web. + + +Cosa non è implementato +======================= + +Il layer IP non processa le opzioni dello header. +Il layer IP non supporta il routing. +Non è supportata la 'Packet fragmentation'. + + +Come configurare Kolibri per il PPP +=================================== + +Vedi ppp.txt + + +Come configurare Kolibri per l'Ethernet +======================================= + +Inanzitutto è necessario possedere una scheda ethernet supportata e +installata, o presente sulla scheda madre. Se non si è certi del tipo di +hardware, si può provare a configurare lo stack. Se l'hardware è +supportato allora verrà notificato e configurato correttamente. + +Setting Up the ARP Table +------------------------ + +Kolibri's ARP table is dynamically created and maintained; You can see what +hosts Kolibri has communicated with by running the ARPSTAT application. + +Enabling Ethernet +----------------- + +Boot Kolibri, then select STACKCFG from the NET menu. +Press the 'Read' Button, then select 'Packet Driver'. +Press 'Change' next to the IP address, and enter the IP address you want +to use. Make sure it is on the same sub-net as the LAN to which you are +connected. +Press 'Apply' to action the changes. +Close the program. + + +The stack is now running, which you can test by pinging Kolibri from a +remote host. + + +The simplest way to connect two PC's together is using a 'Null Modem' +Ethernet cable. These simply cross certain wires over. They can be +purchased from PC stores, but are simple to make. Details can be found +on the web. Look on google for 'ethernet cross over cable' or similar. + + +How to use TCP/IP locally, with no Network +========================================== + +Kolibri supports a form of local loopback that means applications on the +same PC can communicate with each other via sockets as though they +were on separate hosts. To connect to an application on the same machine, +specify the local IP address as the destination address. You do not even +need to configure the stack for ethernet; local loopback will work without +any network hardware. It's great for development and testing. + + +Application Programming Interface +================================= + +The developer can access the stack through interrupt 0x40, function 53. +The file TFTPC.ASM gives a good example of how to use the programming +interface ( at least, for UDP), but as network communication is complex +I'll give an overview. + + +Sockets +======= + +Applications connect to each other and pass information between themselves +through a mechanism called a 'socket'. Sockets are end-points for +communication; You need one at each application to communicate. + +Using sockets is a little like using files on an OS; You open them, read +and write to them, then close them. The only thing that makes life slightly +more complicated is that unlike with a file, you have something intelligent +at the other end ( which for example may not want to close when you do! ) + +Lets deal with the terminology before we go any further. + +socket A unique identifier used by the application for communication. +local port A number that identifies this application on the local host. + Ports are a way to allow multiple applications to communicate + with other hosts without the data becoming mixed up. ( The + technical term is 'multiplex' ). Port numbers are 16 bit. +remote port A number that identifies the application on the remote host + to which we are communicating with. To the remote host, this is + it's 'local port'. Port numbers are 16 bit. +IP Address A 32 bit number that identifies the remote host PC that we are + communicating with. +Passive Refers to the mode by which a socket is opened; When opening in + passive mode, the local PC is awaiting an incoming connection. +Active Refers to the mode by which a socket is opened; When opening in + active mode, the local PC will attempt to connect to a remote + PC. + +When you connect to a socket on a remote PC, you need to specify more than +just the IP address, otherwise the remote stack will not know to which +application it should send your data. You must fully qualify the address, +which means you specify the IP address and the port number. This would be +written like this + +192.168.1.10:80 ; Connect to port 80 on the machine 192.168.1.10 + +Port numbers are important. Some are 'well known' and provide access to +common applications. For example port 80 is used by HTTP servers; That +way I can connect to a webserver on a host without having to find out +what port number the application is listening on. + +This brings me to the way in which you open a socket; As I said earlier, +there are two modes, Passive and Active. A webserver would open a passive +socket, as it is waiting for incoming connection requests. A web browser +would open an active socket because it is attempting to connect to a +specified remote host. + + +Access to programming interface +=============================== +The developer accesses the stack functions through interrupt 0x40, +function 53. Some functions may be accessed through function 52, but these +are mainly for stack configuration. +Here is a summary of the functions that you may use and the parameter +definitions. + + +Get Local IP Address +-------------------- +eax = 52 +ebx = 1 + +IP address returned in eax ( in internet byte order ) + + +Write to stack input queue +-------------------------- +eax = 52 +ebx = 6 +edx = number of bytes to write +esi = pointer to data ( in application space ) + +On return, eax holds 0 for OK, or 0xFFFFFFFF for error. +This interface is for slow network drivers only ( PPP, SLIP ) + + +Read data from network output queue +----------------------------------- +eax = 52 +ebx = 8 +esi = pointer to data ( in application space ) + +On return, eax holds number of bytes transferred. +This interface is for slow network drivers only ( PPP, SLIP ) + + +Open a UDP socket +----------------- +eax = 53 +ebx = 0 +ecx = local port +edx = remote port +esi = remote ip address ( in internet byte order ) + +The socket number allocated is returned in eax. +A return value of 0xFFFFFFFF means no socket could be opened. + + +Open a TCP socket +----------------- +eax = 53 +ebx = 5 +ecx = local port +edx = remote port +esi = remote ip address ( in internet byte order ) +edi = mode : SOCKET_PASSIVE or SOCKET_ACTIVE ( defined in stack.inc ) + +The socket number allocated is returned in eax. +A return value of 0xFFFFFFFF means no socket could be opened. + + +Close a socket (UDP Only ) +-------------------------- +eax = 53 +ebx = 1 +ecx = socket number + +On return, eax holds 0 for OK, or 0xFFFFFFFF for error. + + +Close a socket (TCP Only ) +-------------------------- +eax = 53 +ebx = 8 +ecx = socket number + +On return, eax holds 0 for OK, or 0xFFFFFFFF for error. + + +Poll socket +----------- +eax = 53 +ebx = 2 +ecx = socket number + +On return, eax holds the number of bytes in the receive buffer. + + +Read socket data +---------------- +eax = 53 +ebx = 3 +ecx = socket number + +On return, eax holds the number of bytes remaining, bl holds a data byte. + + +Write to socket ( UDP only ) +---------------------------- +eax = 53 +ebx = 4 +ecx = socket number +edx = number of bytes to write +esi = pointer to data ( in application space ) + +On return, eax holds 0 for OK, or 0xFFFFFFFF for error. + + +Return socket status ( TCP only ) +--------------------------------- +eax = 53 +ebx = 6 +ecx = socket number + +On return, eax holds the sockets TCP status. +This function can be used to determine when a socket has actually connected +to another socket - data cannot be written to a socket until the connection +is established (TCB_ESTABLISHED). The states a socket can be in are defined +in stack.inc as TCB_ + + +Write to socket ( TCP only ) +---------------------------- +eax = 53 +ebx = 7 +ecx = socket number +edx = number of bytes to write +esi = pointer to data ( in application space ) + +On return, eax holds 0 for OK, or 0xFFFFFFFF for error. + + +Check port number +----------------- +eax = 53 +ebx = 9 +ecx = port number + +This function is used to determine if a port number +is in use by any sockets as a local port number. Local +port numbers are normally unique. + +On return, eax is 1 for port number not in use, 0 otherwise. + + +Opening a TCP socket in Kolibri +=============================== + +There are two ways to open a socket - Passive or Active. + +In a Passive connection your application 'listens' for incoming +requests from remote applications. Typically this will be done when +you are implementing a server application that allows any other +application to connect to it. You would specify a 'known' local +port number, such as 80 for a web server. You would leave the +remote IP and remote port number as 0, which indicates any +remote application may connect. + +Once the socket has been opened you would wait for an incoming +connection before doing anything. This can be by either checking +the socket status for TCB_ESTABLISHED, or waiting for data in the +receive buffer. + +In an Active connection, you are making a connection to a specified +remote port. The remote IP and remote port parameters must be filled +in with non-zero values ( otherwise, what are you connecting to? ). +You also specify a unique local port number so the remote application +can uniquely identify you - after all, there may be several applications +on your machine connected to the same remote host. See below for finding +a unique port number. + + +How to find an unused local port number +======================================= + +Typically when you are creating an active connection to a remote +socket you will want to choose a unique local port number. Local +port numbers normally start from 1000; The following code may +be used to obtain an unused port number prior to making the +open socket call. + + mov ecx, 1000 ; local port starting at 1000 + +getlp: + inc ecx + push ecx + mov eax, 53 + mov ebx, 9 + int 0x40 + pop ecx + cmp eax, 0 ; is this local port in use? + jz getlp ; yes - so try next + + ; ecx contains a free local port number + + + +Writing data to a socket +======================== + +There are two functions available depending on whether the socket +was opened for TCP or UDP protocol; The call parameters are the +same however. When the socket is being opened for TCP, use the +status function to poll for a connection - data cannot be written +to a socket until another socket has connected to it, and the +state of the socket is TCB_ESTABLISHED. + +When you write data, the call results in a single IP packet being +created and transmitted. Thus the user application is responsible for +the size of transmitted packets. Keep the packet sizes under 768 bytes. +If you are writing a terminal program like telnet, you may want to send +a packet for each keystroke ( inefficient ) or use a timer to send data +periodically ( say, every second ). + + +Reading data from a socket +========================== + +There is one function to read data from a sockets receive buffer. This +function retrieves one byte at a time. You can use the poll function to +test the receive buffer for data. + + +Closing a socket +================ + +Simply call the appropriate function - there is one for TCP, and another +for UDP. When closing a TCP socket, don't forget that the other end +may continue to send data, so the socket may remain active for a +few seconds after your call. + + +If you have any questions or have suggestions for improving this +document please contact me at mikeh@oceanfree.net. diff --git a/data/it/doexe2.asm b/data/it/doexe2.asm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..eaebd8aaf8 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/doexe2.asm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +filename equ '%EXENAME%' + +virtual at 0 +file filename:3Ch,4 +load pehea dword from 0 +file filename:pehea,0F8h+28h*3 +load NumberOfSections word from 4+6 +load SizeOfOptionalHeader word from 4+14h +if NumberOfSections<>3 +error Expected three sections, .text, .bss and .reloc +end if +if SizeOfOptionalHeader<>0E0h +error Nonstandard PE header +end if +load RelocsRVA dword from 4+0A0h +load RelocsSize dword from 4+0A4h +load ImageBase dword from 4+34h +load TextRVA dword from 4+0F8h+0Ch +load TextSize dword from 4+0F8h+8 +load TextOffs dword from 4+0F8h+14h +load BSSSize dword from 4+0F8h+28h+10h +load RelocRVA dword from 4+0F8h+28h*2+0Ch +load RelocOffs dword from 4+0F8h+28h*2+14h +if BSSSize +error Second section expected to be .bss +end if +if RelocRVA<>RelocsRVA +error Third section expected to be .reloc +end if +;file 'test.exe':pehea+0F8h,28h +;load physofs dword from 4+14h +;load mem dword from 4+8 +;file 'test.exe':physofs+16,4 +;load sz dword from $-4 +end virtual + +file filename:TextOffs,TextSize + +while RelocsSize>8 +virtual at 0 +file filename:RelocOffs,8 +load CurRelocPage dword from 0 +load CurRelocChunkSize dword from 4 +end virtual +RelocsSize=RelocsSize-CurRelocChunkSize +CurRelocChunkSize = CurRelocChunkSize-8 +RelocOffs=RelocOffs+8 +while CurRelocChunkSize +virtual at 0 +file filename:RelocOffs,2 +RelocOffs=RelocOffs+2 +CurRelocChunkSize=CurRelocChunkSize-2 +load s word from 0 +end virtual +CurRelocType = s shr 12 +RelocItem = CurRelocPage + (s and 0xFFF) +if CurRelocType=0 +else if CurRelocType=3 +load z dword from RelocItem-TextRVA +store dword z-(TextRVA+ImageBase) at RelocItem-TextRVA +else +error Unexpected relocation type +end if +end while +end while + +store dword TextSize at 10h +store dword RelocRVA-TextRVA at 14h diff --git a/data/it/drivers/intel_hda.obj b/data/it/drivers/intel_hda.obj new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..de3150d8b1 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/drivers/intel_hda.obj differ diff --git a/data/it/games/checkers b/data/it/games/checkers new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ddf9409e5e Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/games/checkers differ diff --git a/data/it/games/fara b/data/it/games/fara new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..623c30e85f Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/games/fara differ diff --git a/data/it/games/kosskin.gfx b/data/it/games/kosskin.gfx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bb40014f13 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/games/kosskin.gfx differ diff --git a/data/it/games/megamaze b/data/it/games/megamaze new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f602706117 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/games/megamaze differ diff --git a/data/it/games/reversi b/data/it/games/reversi new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2dcc36a151 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/games/reversi differ diff --git a/data/it/games/rforces b/data/it/games/rforces new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2f8a9331da Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/games/rforces differ diff --git a/data/it/games/soko b/data/it/games/soko new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e5b95f3a26 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/games/soko differ diff --git a/data/it/games/xonix b/data/it/games/xonix new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2706da9bbc Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/games/xonix differ diff --git a/data/it/hdread b/data/it/hdread new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dc74932327 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/hdread differ diff --git a/data/it/icons.dat b/data/it/icons.dat new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2b7b73dab0 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/icons.dat @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +AA-KFM -005-/SYS/FILE MANAGERS/KFM - * +AB-TINYPAD -009-/SYS/TINYPAD - * +BA-EOLITE -002-/SYS/FILE MANAGERS/EOLITE - * +CA-SHELL -020-/SYS/SHELL - * +BB-KFAR -016-/SYS/FILE MANAGERS/KFAR - * +AC-RDSAVE -017-/SYS/RDSAVE - * +BC-CALC -004-/SYS/CALC - * +CB-ANIMAGE -015-/SYS/MEDIA/ANIMAGE - * +JA-KPACK -010-/SYS/KPACK - * +IH-SNAKE -003-/SYS/GAMES/SNAKE - * +JI-MINE -014-/SYS/GAMES/MINE - * +II-LIFE2 -013-/SYS/DEMOS/LIFE2 - * +JH-MBLOCKS -011-/SYS/GAMES/MBLOCKS - * +HI-PONG -012-/SYS/GAMES/PONG3 - * +GI-15 -000-/SYS/GAMES/15 - * +HH-CLICKS -018-/SYS/GAMES/CLICKS - * +JB-DOCPACK -008-/SYS/DOCPACK - * +IA-BOARD -019-/SYS/DEVELOP/BOARD - * +JC-HEXEDIT -022-/SYS/DEVELOP/HEED - * +HA-MTDBG -006-/SYS/DEVELOP/MTDBG - * +AH-PIPES -026-/SYS/GAMES/PIPES - * +AI-SUDOKU -025-/SYS/GAMES/SUDOKU - * +BI-GOMOKU -024-/SYS/GAMES/GOMOKU - * +BH-XONIX -021-/SYS/GAMES/XONIX - * +GH-CHECKERS-001-/SYS/GAMES/CHECKERS - * +CI-KOSILKA -023-/SYS/GAMES/KOSILKA - * +CH-FLOOD-IT-027-/SYS/GAMES/FLOOD-IT - * +IB-FASM -010-/RD/1/DEVELOP/FASM - * diff --git a/data/it/iconstrp.png b/data/it/iconstrp.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..82c53705f0 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/iconstrp.png differ diff --git a/data/it/index_htm b/data/it/index_htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c88fcc52bb --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/index_htm @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ + + + + + KolibriOS web server - default message + + +

Welcome to KolibriOS server

+

+ If you can read this with an external html-browser then Kolibri + networking is correctly set up. +

This file: /rd/1/index.htm +

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/data/it/kerpack b/data/it/kerpack new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..511e23d2da Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/kerpack differ diff --git a/data/it/keymap.key b/data/it/keymap.key new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f6f2a5d8a7 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/keymap.key differ diff --git a/data/it/kuzkina.mid b/data/it/kuzkina.mid new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..01f4ecb91d Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/kuzkina.mid differ diff --git a/data/it/lang.inc b/data/it/lang.inc new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dc151ef654 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/lang.inc @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +lang fix en \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/it/lang.ini b/data/it/lang.ini new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c03a291d7d --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/lang.ini @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +[start] +startlng = 1 + +[comkey] +ccomkey1 = 1 +ccomkey2 = 4 +ccomkey3 = 7 + +[altkey] +altkey1 = 1 +altkey2 = 4 +altkey3 = 7 +altkey4 = 3 +altkey5 = 5 +altkey6 = 6 +altkey7 = 2 +altkey8 = 0 +altkey9 = 0 +altkey0 = 0 + +[langs] +1 = En +2 = Fi +3 = Ge +4 = Ru +5 = Fr +6 = Et +7 = Ua \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/it/lib/msgbox.obj b/data/it/lib/msgbox.obj new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..655d3dee72 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/lib/msgbox.obj differ diff --git a/data/it/lib/pixlib.obj b/data/it/lib/pixlib.obj new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ca2e94a778 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/lib/pixlib.obj differ diff --git a/data/it/lib/sort.obj b/data/it/lib/sort.obj new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..063da99799 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/lib/sort.obj differ diff --git a/data/it/menu.dat b/data/it/menu.dat new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..eb13da7c13 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/menu.dat @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ +#0 **** MAIN **** +Giochi > /@1 +Demo > /@4 +Grafica > /@6 +Multimedia > /@7 +Sviluppo > /@8 +Sistema > /@10 +Data processing > /@14 +Network > /@15 +Altro > /@18 +Aiuto /rd/1/docpack +Esegui applicazione /rd/1/run +Spegni /rd/1/end +#1 **** GAMES **** +Giochi di logica > /@2 +Arcade > /@3 +Emulatori /rd/1/e80 +Memory /rd/1/games/mblocks +FreeCell /rd/1/games/freecell +Pipes /rd/1/games/pipes +Kosilka /rd/1/games/kosilka +RockeT ForceS /rd/1/games/rforces +Trova i numeri /rd/1/games/FindNumbers +#2 **** LOGICAL GAMES **** +C4 /rd/1/games/c4 +Gioco del quindici /rd/1/games/15 +Campo minato /rd/1/games/mine +Just Clicks /rd/1/games/clicks +Checkers /rd/1/games/checkers +SQ_GAME /rd/1/games/sq_game +Color Lines /rd/1/games/lines +Flood-it! /rd/1/games/flood-it +MegaMaze /rd/1/games/megamaze +Battaglia navale /rd/1/games/sw +Sudoku /rd/1/games/sudoku +Go-moku /rd/1/games/gomoku +Reversi /rd/1/games/reversi +#3 **** ARCADES **** +Tetris /rd/1/games/tetris +Pong /rd/1/games/pong +New Pong /rd/1/games/pong3 +Red Square /rd/1/games/rsquare +Xonix /rd/1/games/xonix +ArcanII /rd/1/games/arcanii +Phenix /rd/1/games/phenix +Snake /rd/1/games/snake +#4 **** DEMOS **** +3D > /@5 +Fuoco /rd/1/demos/fire +Cerchio /rd/1/demos/circle +Frattale /rd/1/demos/tinyfrac +Demo Colori /rd/1/demos/colorref +Occhi /rd/1/demos/eyes +Vortice /rd/1/demos/tube +Plasma /rd/1/demos/plasma +Moveback /rd/1/demos/movback +Life /rd/1/demos/life2 +TranTest /rd/1/demos/trantest +WEB /rd/1/demos/web +Fuochi d'artificio /rd/1/demos/firework +UnvWater /rd/1/demos/unvwater +#5 **** 3D demos **** +ScreenSaver /rd/1/3d/crownscr +Cubo 3D /rd/1/3d/3dcube2 +Labirinto 3D /rd/1/3d/free3d04 +Cuore 3D /rd/1/3d/3dsheart +View3DS /rd/1/3d/view3ds +CubeLine /rd/1/3d/cubeline +3D-textured cube 2 /rd/1/3d/cubetext +Gears /rd/1/3d/gears +FlatWave /rd/1/3d/flatwav +3D-waved area /rd/1/3d/3dwav +#6 **** GRAPHICS **** +Visualizzatore Immagini /rd/1/media/kiv +Animage /rd/1/media/animage +#7 **** AUDIO **** +MidAMP /rd/1/media/midamp +CD player /rd/1/media/cdp +#8 **** PROGRAMMING **** +Esempi > /@9 +Gestore di archivi KPack /rd/1/kpack +Compilatore FASM /rd/1/develop/fasm +Debug Board /rd/1/develop/board +Debugger /rd/1/develop/mtdbg +Hex2Dec2Bin /rd/1/develop/h2d2b +Codici ASCII /rd/1/develop/keyascii +SCAN-codes /rd/1/develop/scancode +#9 **** EXAMPLES **** +Threads /rd/1/develop/thread +IPC /rd/1/develop/ipc +Color slider /rd/1/demos/cslide +Esempio Console 1 /rd/1/develop/testcon2 +Esempio Console 2 /rd/1/develop/test_gets +Esempio Message Boxes /rd/1/demos/use_mb +#10 **** SYSTEM **** +Impostazioni > /@11 +System sensors > /@12 +Work with files > /@13 +Testing > /@19 +Opzioni Accessibilità > /@20 +Debug board /rd/1/develop/board +#11 **** SETTINGS **** +Device /rd/1/setup +Generatore di sfondi /rd/1/pic4 +Colori e temi /rd/1/desktop +Gestore icone /rd/1/icon +MyKey /rd/1/mykey +Video mode for ATI /rd/1/vmode +#12 **** SYSTEM SENSORS **** +Process manager /rd/1/cpu +PCI devices /rd/1/pcidev +Test graphics speed /rd/1/mgb +CPUID /rd/1/cpuid +Ghost Monitor /rd/1/gmon +K. Bus disconnected /rd/1/kbd +HDD informer /rd/1/hdd_info +Read HDD /rd/1/hdread +#13 **** WORK WITH FILES **** +KFAR /rd/1/File Managers/kfar +KFM /rd/1/File Managers/kfm +Eolite /rd/1/File Managers/Eolite +SHELL console /rd/1/shell +Salva immagine RD /rd/1/rdsave +#14 **** DATA PROCESSING **** +Calcolatrice /rd/1/calc +Tinypad /rd/1/tinypad +TextEdit /rd/1/develop/t_edit +Table Processor /rd/1/table +Graph builder /rd/1/graph +Hex-Editor /rd/1/develop/heed +#15 **** NET **** +Servers > /@16 +Clients > /@17 +Configurazione /rd/1/network/stackcfg +Zero-Config /rd/1/network/zeroconf +Network status /rd/1/network/ethstat +ARP status /rd/1/network/arpstat +#16 **** SERVERS **** +SMTPS /rd/1/network/smtps +HTTPS /rd/1/network/https +FTPS /rd/1/network/ftps +#17 **** CLIENTS **** +TFTP client /rd/1/network/tftpc +Internet-chess /rd/1/network/chess +Internet downloader /rd/1/network/downloader +Text-based browser /rd/1/htmlv +NNTP-NewsGroups /rd/1/network/nntpc +TELNET /rd/1/network/telnet +POP - MAIL /rd/1/network/popc +Client IRC /rd/1/network/airc +YAHOO messenger (demo) /rd/1/network/ym +JMail /rd/1/network/jmail +VNC client /rd/1/network/vncclient +DNS resolver /rd/1/network/nslookup +#18 **** OTHER **** +Orologio analogico /rd/1/demos/aclock +Orologio binario /rd/1/demos/bcdclk +Timer /rd/1/demos/timer +ScreenShoter /rd/1/scrshoot +Calendario /rd/1/calendar +Lettore RTF /rd/1/rtfread +#19 **** SYSTEM TESTS **** +Protection test /rd/1/test +Test Monitor /rd/1/disptest +#20 **** SYSTEM SPECIAL **** +Lente di ingrandimento /rd/1/magnify +Tastiera da schermo /rd/1/zkey +Tavola caratteri /rd/1/ASCIIVju +## diff --git a/data/it/network/jmail b/data/it/network/jmail new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c6091335c2 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/network/jmail differ diff --git a/data/it/network/zeroconf.ini b/data/it/network/zeroconf.ini new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..39b2aa5948 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/network/zeroconf.ini @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +[ipconfig] +; type should be static or zeroconf +; zeroconf means the service first tries to contact a DHCP server +; If dhcp is not available, it switches to link-local +type = zeroconf +ip = 10.0.2.15 +gateway = 10.0.2.2 +dns = 10.0.2.2 +subnet = 255.255.255.0 +[proxy] +; If Internet connection requires HTTP proxy, set it here +; and uncomment following lines: +;proxy = +;port = +; If proxy requires authentification, uncomment following lines too +; (otherwise, leave them commented): +;user = +;password= + diff --git a/data/it/panel.ini b/data/it/panel.ini new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bbd906d433 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/it/panel.ini @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +[Variables] +PanelHeight=24 +PanelWidth=0 +SoftenHeight=4 +ButtonTopOffset=2 +ButtonBottOffset=2 + +[Flags] +SoftenUp=1 +SoftenDown=1 +MinLeftButton=1 +MinRightButton=0 +MenuButton=1 +RunApplButtons=1 +ClnDesktButton=1 +Clock=1 +CpuUsage=1 +ChangeLang=1 +Attachment=1 +ButtonsStyle=0 + +[Colors] +MenuButton=0,100,0 +ClnDesktButton=0,128,255 +Clock=0,128,255 +CpuUsage=0,100,0 +CpuUsageBckgr=255,0,0 +ChangeLang=0,128,255 +PageList=255,255,255 +Text=255,255,255 +AltTab=255,128,0 + +[ApplicationsPaths] +End=/sys/END +Menu=/sys/@MENU +Run=/sys/RUN +PrnScr=/sys/SCRSHOOT +Clock=/sys/CALENDAR +CpuUsage=/sys/GMON +MouseEmul=/sys/MOUSEMUL diff --git a/data/it/setup.dat b/data/it/setup.dat new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1172ac3981 Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/setup.dat differ diff --git a/data/it/vmode b/data/it/vmode new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0c964ece6a Binary files /dev/null and b/data/it/vmode differ